L0607448 Craftsman 10" Tablesaw

Owner's Manual
CRRFr MRH
1.5 Horsepower (continuous duty)
2 Horsepower (maximum developed)
3450 R.P.M. (no load R.P.M.)
10-in. LE SAW
Model No.
152.221140
CAUTION: Customer Helpline

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY; Read
and follow all of the Safety and
1-800-897-7709
Operating Instructions before Please have your Model No.
Operating this Table Saw. and Serial No. available.
Sears, Roebuck and Co., Hoffman Estates, IL 60179 U.S.A.

Part No. OR91551
Revision: D Espa5ol pg. 49
SECTION PAGE
Warranty .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Product Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 2
Glossary of Terms .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Safety instructions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
Guidelines for Extension Cords ................................................................................................................................... 5
Grounding instructions ................................................................................................................................................. 6
Specific Safety instructions for Table Saw .................................................................................................................. 7
Accessories and Attachments ...................................................................................................................................... 9
Carton Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Know Your Table Saw .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Assembly instructions ................................................................................................................................................. 15
Operations and Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 25
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 41
Part List ......................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Espanol ......................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Service information ...................................................................................................................................................... 92
FULL ONE YEAR WARRANTY
If this product fails due to a defect in material or workmanship within one year from the date of purchase, return it
to the nearest Sears Service Center for repair, free of charge.
If this product is used for commercial or rental purposes, this warranty applies only for 90 days from date of purchase.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary, from state to state.
Sears, Roebuck and Co., Dept 817 WA, Hoffman Estates, IL 60179
lO-in. Table Saw Max depth-of-cut at 90-degree 3-3/8-in.

Motor type Induction Max depth-of-cut at 45-degree 2-1/4-in.
Continuous duty HP 1.5 Max rip to the right of the blade 25-in.
Maximum developed HP 2 Max rip to the left of the blade 24-in.
Amps 15/7.5 Table in front of blade at max depth-of-cut 12-1/2-in.
Volts 120/240 Max dado width 13/16-in.
Hertz 60 Max dado blade diameter 8-in.
RPM 3450 R.P.M. (no load R.P.M.) Left and right table wing lO-in, Cast Iron
Blade tilt Left tilt Weight of table saw 350 Ibs.
Blade drive Poly-V Belt
Blade diameter 10-in.
Blade arbor 5/8-in.
To avoid electrical shock to yourself and damage to the
Number of teeth 40
Table Saw, use proper circuit protection. Do not expose
Blade speed 3450 R.P.M. to rain, or use in a damp environment.
Fence type Front locking, Extruded
aluminum Fence and Rails The Table Saw is factory wired for 120V, 60 Hz, opera-
tion. Connect to a 120V, 15 amp branch circuit and use
a 15 amp time delay fuse or circuit breaker. The electri-
cal circuit cannot have any wire size less than #14. To
avoid shock or fire, replace power cord immediately if it
is damaged in any way.
Anti-KickbackFingers- Asafetydeviceattachedtothe Kerf- Thematerialremovedbythebladeinthework-
bladeguardandsplitterassembly
designed tostopa pieceduringanycuttingoperation.
workpiecefrombeingthrownbackduringa cuttingopera-
tion.
Kickback- Whentheworkpiece is thrownbacktowards
theoperator duringa cuttingoperation whentheworkpiece
Arbor- Theshaftonwhichthebladeor accessory
cut- initiallycontactsthebladeorif theworkpiece pinches
the
ting-toolis mounted. blade.Kickback isdangerous andcanresultinserious
injury.
BevelCut- Theoperationofmakinganycutwiththe
bladesetona degreeotherthan90degrees. MiterCut- Theoperation
ofmakinga cutusingthemiter
gaugeatanyangleotherthanzerodegrees.
CompoundCut- Theoperation
ofmakingbotha bevel
anda mitercutatonetime. PushStick- Anaccessorydevicethatcanbemadeor
purchasedtohelppushtheworkpiecethroughtheblade.
Apushstickis usedtokeeptheoperator's
handsaway
Crosscut- Theoperationofmakinga cutacrossthe fromthebladewhenrippinga narrowworkpiece.
grainorwidthofa workpiece.
Rabbet- Asquarenotchintheedgeoftheworkpiece.
Dado- Anon-through cutthatproduces a squarenotch.
A dadoistypicallyfrom1/8-in.to 13/16-in.
wide.Adado
requires
a specialsetofblades,notincluded withthis Resaw- Theoperationofmakinga cuttoreducethe
tablesaw. thickness
oftheworkpiece.
Featherboard- Anaccessorydevicethatcanbemadeor RipCut- Theoperation

of makinga cutwiththegrainof
purchasedtohelpguideor holddowna workpiece
during theworkpiece.
cuttingoperations.
SawBladePath- Theareathatis directlyinlinewiththe

Freehand - Averydangerousoperationofmakinga cut blade,including
areaover,under,behindandinfrontofit.
withoutusingthefenceormitergaugeina cuttingopera-
tion. Freehandcutsmustneverbeperformedona Table
Saw. Setof the SawBlade- Thedistance thatthetipsofthe
sawbladeareangledoutwards fromthethicknessofthe
blade.Thesetofthesawbladeteethallowsfortheblade
Gum,Pitchor Resin- Asticky,sapbasedresidue
that bodytopasssafelythroughallcuts.
comesfromwoodproducts.
Table/WorkArea- Thetotalsurfaceofthetopofthetable
Heel- Themisalignment
ofthebladetothemiterslots; sawonwhichtheworkpiece restswhileset-upor cutting
whenthebladeis notparalleltothemiterslots.
operations
arebeingperformed.
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 9. ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION. Any power
Operating a Table Saw can be dangerous if safety and tool can throw debris into the eyes during opera-
common sense are ignored. The operator must be tions, which could cause severe and permanent
familiar with the operation of the tool. Read this manual eye damage. Everyday eyeglasses are NOT safety
to understand this Table Saw. DO NOT operate this glasses. ALWAYS wear Safety Goggles (that com-
Table Saw if you do not fully understand the limitations ply with ANSI standard Z87.t ) when operating
of this tool. DO NOT modify this Table Saw in any way. power tools. Safety Goggles are available at Sears
REMEMBER: Your personal safety is your Retail Stores. Hearing equipment should comply
responsibility. with ANSi S3.t 9 Standards.
BEFORE USING THE TABLE SAW
To avoid serious injury and damage to the tool, read

and follow all of the Safety and Operating Instructions 10. ALWAYS UNPLUG THE TOOL FROM THE ELEC=
before operating the Table Saw.
TRICAL RECEPTACLE when making adjustments,
changing parts or performing any maintenance.
1. READ the entire Owner's Manual. LEARN how to
use the tool for its intended applications. 11. KEEP PROTECTIVE GUARDS IN PLACE AND IN
WORKING ORDER.
2. GROUND ALL TOOLS. If the tool is supplied with
a 3-prong plug, it must be plugged into a 3-contact 12. AVOID ACCIDENTAL STARTING. Make sure that
electrical receptacle. The 3rd prong is used to
the power switch is in the "OFF" position before plug-
ground the tool and provide protection against ging in the power cord to the electrical receptacle.
accidental electric shock. DO NOT remove the 3rd
prong. See Grounding Instructions. 13. REMOVE ALL MAINTENANCE TOOLS from the
immediate area prior to turning the tool "ON".
3. AVOID A DANGEROUS WORKING ENVIRON=
MENT. DO NOT Use electrical tools in a damp 14. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
environment or expose them to rain. Use of incorrect or improper accessories could
cause serious injury to the operator and cause
4. DO NOT use electrical tools in the presence of
damage to the tool. If in doubt, check the instruction
flammable liquids or gasses.
manual that comes with that particular accessory.
5. ALWAYS keep the work area clean, well lit, and 15. NEVER LEAVE A RUNNING TOOL UNATTENDED.
organized. DO NOT work in an environment with Turn the power switch to the "OFF" position. DO
floor surfaces that are slippery from debris, grease,
NOT leave the tool until it has come to a complete
and wax.
stop.
6. KEEP ViSiTORS AND CHILDREN AWAY from the
16. DO NOT STAND ON A TOOL. Serious injury could
table saw. DO NOT permit people to be in the
result if the tool tips over or you accidentally contact
immediate work area, especially when the electrical the tool.
tool is operating.
17. DO NOT store anything above or near the tool
7. DO NOT FORCE THE TOOL to perform an opera-
where anyone might try to stand on the tool to
tion for which it was not designed. It will do a safer reach it.
and higher quality job by only performing operations
for which the tool was intended.
18. MAINTAIN YOUR BALANCE. DO NOT extend
yourself over the tool. Wear oil resistant rubber-
8. WEAR PROPER CLOTHING. DO NOT wear loose
soled shoes. Keep floor clear of debris, grease, and
clothing, gloves, neckties, or jewelry. These items wax.
can get caught in the machine during operations
and pull the operator into the moving parts. Users 19. MAINTAIN TOOLS WITH CARE. Always keep tools
must wear a protective cover on their hair, if the clean and in good working order. Keep all blades
hair is long, to prevent it from contacting any
and tool bits sharp.
moving parts.
20. EACHAND EVERY TIME, CHECK FOR DAM= GUIDELINES FOR
AGED PARTS PRIOR TO USING THE TOOL.
EXTENSION CORDS
Carefully check all guards to see that they operate
properly, are not damaged, and perform their
The smaller the gauge-number, the larger diameter of
intended functions. Check for alignment, binding or
the extension cord. If in doubt of the proper size of an
breaking of moving parts. A guard or other part that
extension cord, use a shorter and thicker cord. An
is damaged should be immediately repaired or
undersized cord will cause a drop in line voltage result-
replaced.
ing in a loss of power and overheating. USE ONLY A
3-WIRE EXTENSION CORD THAT HAS A 3-PRONG
21. CHILDPROOF THE WORKSHOP AREA by remov- GROUNDING PLUG AND A 3-POLE RECEPTACLE
ing switch keys, unplugging tools from the electrical THAT ACCEPTS THE TOOL'S PLUG.
receptacles, and using padlocks.
22. DO NOT OPERATE TOOL iF UNDER THE If you are using an extension cord outdoors, be sure it
is marked with the suffix "W-A" ("W" in Canada) to indi-
iNFLUENCE OF DRUGS OR ALCOHOL.
cate that it is acceptable for outdoor use.
23. SECURE ALL WORK. When it is possible, use

Be sure your extension cord is properly sized, and in
clamps or jigs to secure the workpiece. This is safer
good electrical condition. Always replace a damaged
than attempting to hold the workpiece with your
hands. extension cord or have it repaired by a qualified person
before using it.
24. STAY ALERT, WATCH WHAT YOU ARE DOING,

AND USE COMMON SENSE WHEN OPERATING Protect your extension cords from sharp objects, exces-
sive heat, and damp or wet areas.
A POWER TOOL. DO NOT USE A TOOL WHILE
TIRED OR UNDER THE iNFLUENCE OF DRUGS,
ALCOHOL, OR MEDICATION. A moment of
inattention while operating power tools may result
in serious personal injury. 120 VOLT OPERATION ONLY
25' LONG 50' LONG 100' LONG
25. Use of this tool can generate and disburse dust or 0 to 6 Amps 18 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG
other airborne particles, including wood dust,
6 to 10 Amps 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG
crystalline silica dust and asbestos dust. Direct
particles away from face and body. Always operate 10 to 12 Amps 16 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG
tool in well ventilated area and provide for proper 14 AWG 12 AWG Not
12 to 15 Amps
dust removal. Use dust collection system wherever Recommended
possible. Exposure to the dust may cause serious
and permanent respiratory or other injury, including
silicosis (a serious lung disease), cancer, and
death. Avoid breathing the dust, and avoid pro-
longed contact with dust. Allowing dust to get into
your mouth or eyes, or lay on your skin may pro- 240 VOLT OPERATION ONLY
mote absorption of harmful material. Always use
properly fitting NIOSH/OSHA approved respiratory 25' LONG 50' LONG 100' LONG
protection appropriate for the dust exposure, and
wash exposed areas with soap and water. 0 to 6 Amps 18 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG

26. USE A PROPER EXTENSION CORD iN GOOD
CONDiTiON. When using an extension cord, be
sure to use one heavy enough to carry the current 12 to 15 Amps 14 AWG 12 AWG Not
your product will draw. Please see "MiNiMUM Recommended
RECOMMENDED GAUGE FOR EXTENSION
CORDS (AWG)" table for correct sizing of an
extension cord. If in doubt, use the next heavier
gauge.
27. DiRECTiON OF FEED. Feed work into a blade or

cutter against the direction of rotation of the blade
or cutter only.
THIS TOOL MUST BE GROUNDED WHILE IN USE USE ONLY A 3-WIRE EXTENSION CORD THAT HAS
TO PROTECT THE OPERATOR FROM ELECTRIC A 3-PRONG GROUNDING PLUG AND A 3-POLE
SHOCK. RECEPTACLE THAT ACCEPTS THE TOOL'S PLUG.
IN THE EVENT OF A MALFUNCTION OR BREAK- REPLACE A DAMAGED OR WORN CORD IMMEDI-

DOWN, grounding provides the path of least resistance ATELY.
for electric current and reduces the risk of electric
shock. This tool is equipped with an electric cord that FOR GROUNDED, CORD=CONNECTED MACHINES
has an equipment-grounding conductor and a ground- iNTENDED FOR USE ON A SUPPLY CiRCUiT HAVING
ing plug. The plug MUST be plugged into a matching A NOMINAL RATING LESS THAN 150 VOLTS.
electrical receptacle that is properly installed and
grounded in accordance with ALL local codes and This tool is intended for use on a circuit that has an
ordinances. electrical receptacle as shown in FIGURE "IA'.
FIGURE "IA" shows a 3-wire electrical plug and elec-
DO NOT MODIFY THE PLUG PROVIDED. If it will not trical receptacle that has a grounding conductor. If a
fit the electrical receptacle, have the proper electrical properly grounded electrical receptacle is not available,
receptacle installed by a qualified electrician. an adapter as shown in FIGURE "IB" can be used to
temporarily connect this plug to a 2-contact ungrounded
IMPROPER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION of the equip- receptacle. The adapter has a rigid lug extending from it
ment-grounding conductor can result in risk of electric that MUST be connected to a permanent earth ground,
shock. The conductor with the green insulation (with such as a properly grounded receptacle box. THIS
or without yellow stripes) is the equipment-grounding ADAPTER IS PROHiBiTED iN CANADA.
conductor. DO NOT connect the equipment-grounding
conductor to a live terminal if repair or replacement of CAUTION: In all cases, make certain the electrical
the electric cord or plug is necessary. receptacle in question is properly grounded. If you are
not sure have a certified electrician check the electrical
CHECK with a qualified electrician or service personnel receptacle.
if you do not completely understand the grounding
instructions, or if you are not sure the tool is properly The motor supplied with your Table Saw is a dual volt-
grounded. age, 120/240 volt, single phase motor. If it is desired to
operate your table saw at 240 volts, it is necessary to
The motor supplied with your Table Saw is a dual reconnect the motor leads in the motor junction box by
voltage 120/240 volts, 60 hertz alternating current, following the wiring diagram on the junction box cover.
single phase motor. It is shipped wired for 120 volts
application. Never connect the green or ground wire
to a live terminal.
MAKE CERTAIN the motor is disconnected from power
source before reconnecting motor leads.
Fig. 1A Fig. 1B
grounding
120 Volt 120 Volt
adapter lug _
grounding conductor
grounding conductor
0
"'_ 3-p rong
electrical
receptacle
2-prong
3-wire electrical cord electrical
3-wire electrical cord receptacle
It is also necessary to replace the 120 volt plug, sup- MAKE CERTAIN that masks or respirators are
plied with the motor, with a UL/CSA Listed plug suitable MSHA/NIOSH approvedl.
for 240 volts and rated current of the saw. Contact a
The operation of any Table Saw can result in debris
local qualified electrician for proper procedures to install
being thrown into your eyes, which can result in severe
the plug. The table saw must comply with all local and
eye damage. ALWAYS wear Safety Goggles (that com-
national electrical codes after the 240 volt plug is
installed. ply with ANSi standard Z87.1) when operating the Table
Saw. Safety Goggles are available at Sears Retail
The table saw with a 240 volt plug should only be con- Stores. Keep your thumbs and fingers away from the
nected to an outlet having the same configuration as blade while it is spinning.
the plug shown in Figure "1C'. No adapter is available
or should be used with the 240 volt plug.
Fig. 1 C grounded outlet box

current Basic precautions should always be followed when
240 VOLT carrying
using your Table Saw. To reduce the risk of injury,
©
prongs
electrical shock or fire, comply with the safety rules
listed below:
1. READ and understand the instruction manual

grounding blade is
longest of the 3 blades
© 2.
3.
DO NOT OPERATE THiS MACHINE
OBTAIN ADVICE FROM YOUR SUPERVISOR,

until it is
assembled and installed according to the instructions.
instructor, or another qualified person if you are not

familiar with the operation of this machine.
4. DO NOT leave the Table Saw plugged into the elec-

trical outlet. Unplug Table Saw from the outlet when
MAKE CERTAIN the receptacle in question is properly not in use and before servicing, changing blades
grounded. If you are not sure have a qualified electri- and cleaning.
cian check the receptacle.
5. ALWAYS turn the power switch "OFF" before
unplugging the Table Saw.
6. TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF ELECTRICAL
This Table Saw is for indoor use only. Do not expose to
SHOCK, do not use outdoors. Do not expose to
rain or use in damp locations.
rain. Store indoors.
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7. FOLLOW all electrical and safety codes, including
FOR TABLE SAWS the National Electric Code (NEC) and the
Occupational Safety and Health Regulations
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 (OSHA). All electrical connections and wiring should
be made by qualified personnel only.
8. DO NOT handle the plug or Table Saw with wet

hands.
SOME DUST CREATED BY POWER SANDING,
SAWING, GRINDING, DRILLING AND OTHER CON= 9. USE only as described in this manual. USE acces-
STRUCTION ACTIVITIES contains chemicals known to sories only recommended by Sears.
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Some examples of these chemicals are: 10. DO NOT pull the Table Saw by the power cord.
NEVER allow the power cord to come in contact
• lead from lead-based paints, with sharp edges, hot surfaces, oil or grease.
• crystalline silica from bricks and cement and other
masonry products, and 11. DO NOT unplug the Table Saw by pulling on the
power cord. ALWAYS grasp the plug, not the cord.
• arsenic and chromium from chemically-treated lumber.
Your risk from these exposures varies, depending on 12. REPLACE a damaged cord immediately. DO NOT
how often you do this type of work. To reduce your use a damaged cord or plug. If the Table Saw is not
exposure to these chemicals: work in a well ventilated operating properly, or has been damaged, left out-
doors or has been in contact with water, return it to
area, and work with approved safety equipment, such
a Sears Service Center.
as those dust masks that are specially designed to filter
out microscopic particles. 13 DO NOT use the Table Saw as a toy. DO NOT use
near or around children.
14. TheTableSawis designedforhomeuseor light 27. NEVERperformlayout,assemblyorset-upworkon
commercial
dutyONLY. thetable/work
areawhenthemachineis running.
15. CONNECT TableSawtoa properlygroundedoutlet 28. NEVER reset the thermal-overload button before
only.Seegroundinginstructions. you have turned the table saw "OFF".
16. ALWAYSUSEtheguardswhenever possible. 29. PROPERLY SUPPORT long or wide workpiece.
Checktoseethattheyarein place,securedand
30. TURN THE SAW "OFF"
workingcorrectly. and unplug from power
source. Clean off the table/work area before leav-
17. AVOIDKICKBACKby: ing the saw. LOCK the START/STOP switch with
" Keepingbladesharpandfreeof rustandpitch. padlock provided to prevent unauthorized use.
,, Keepingripfenceparallelto sawblade. 31. ALWAYS position auxiliary fence at least 2-inches
,, Using saw blade guard and splitter assembly for
in front of saw blade when using auxiliary fence as
every possible operation, including all through-
a stop when cross cutting.
sawing.
,, Pushing the workpiece past the saw blade prior to 32. The right extension wing MUST BE completely
release. assembled and motor cover closed and fastened
• Never rip a workpiece that is twisted or before table saw is to be connected to the power
warped, or does not have a straight edge to guide source.
along the fence.
33. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION regarding the safe
• Using featherboards when the blade guard and
splitter assembly cannot be used. and proper operation of this product is available
from the National Safety Council, 1121 Spring Lake
,, Never sawing a large workpiece that cannot be
controlled. Drive, Itasca, IL 60143-3201 in the Accident
Prevention Manual for Industrial Operation and also
,, Never using the fence as a guide when cross-
in the Safety Data Sheets provided by the NSC.
cutting.
Please also refer to the American National
• Never sawing a workpiece with loose knots or
Standards Institute ANSI 01.1 Safety Requirements
other flaws.
for Woodworking Machinery and the U.S.
18. REMOVE cut-off pieces and debris from the table Department of Labor OSHA 1910.213 Regulations.
before starting the saw. The vibration of the saw 34. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Refer to them
may cause them to move into the saw blade and be
frequently and use them to instruct other users.
thrown out. After cutting, turn the saw off. When
the blade has come to a complete stop, unplug the
saw and remove all debris. information regarding the safe and proper operation of
this tool is available from the following sources:
19. NEVER START the saw with the workpiece against
the blade.
Power Tool Institute
20. NEVER perform "free-hand" operations. Use either 1300 Summer Avenue
the fence or miter gauge to position and guide the Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
workpiece. Hold the workpiece firmly against the www.powertoolinstitute.org
miter gauge or fence.
National Safety Council
21. USE a push stick(s) for ripping a narrow workpiece. 1121 Spring Lake Drive
22. AVOID AWKWARD OPERATIONS AND HAND Itasca, IL 60143-3201
POSiTiONS where a sudden slip could cause a
American National Standards institute
hand to move into the blade.
25 West 43rd Street
23. KEEP arms, hands and fingers away from the blade. 4th floor
New York, NY 10036
24. NEVER have any part of your body in line with the www.ansi.org
path of the saw blade.
25. NEVER reach around or over the blade. ANSi 01.1 Safety Requirements for Woodworking\
Machines, and the U.S. Department of Labor regulations
26. NEVER attempt to free a stalled blade without first www.osha.gov
turning the machine "OFF" and unplugging it from
the power source.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES Sears may recommend other accessories not listed in
this manual.
Visit your Sears Hardware Department or see the Sears
Power and Hand Tool Catalog for the following acces-
sories. See your nearest Sears Hardware Department or Sears
Power and Hand Tool Catalog for other accessories.
ITEM STOCK NUMBER
* Auxiliary Fence, Rip Fence 29878 Do not use any accessory unless you have completely
* Miter Gauge Extension & Stop 29879 read the Owner's Manual for that accessory.
* Stock Clamp, Miter Gauge 29880

* Dust Chute with Dust Port 22102
* Micro-Adjustment Assembly 29881 Use only accessories recommended for this table saw.
* Table Insert - Standard 29882 Using other accessories may cause serious injury and
cause damage to the table saw.
* Table Insert - Dado 29885
* Table Insert - Molding Cutterhead 29887
* Saw Blade - Leitz, 10-in. x 40 tooth 29888
variable pitch blade
* Fence Guide System 32371
CONSTRUCTING A FEATHERBOARD
Fig. 2A
24"
5"
Figure 2A illustrates dimensions for making a typical Fig. 2B

featherboard. The material, which the featherboard is
constructed of, should be straight piece of wood that is
free of knots and cracks. Featherboards are used to
keep the work in contact with the fence and table and
help prevent kickbacks. Clamp the featherboard to the
fence and table so that the leading edge of the feather-
board will support the workpiece until the cut is com-
pleted.
Use featherboards for all non-through cutting opera-

tions where the guard and splitter assembly must be
removed. Always replace the guard and splitter
assembly when the non-through cutting operations
are finished. See figure 2B.
CONSTRUCTING A PUSHSTICK
When ripping work less than 4 inches wide, a pushstick should be used to complete the feed and could easily be
made from scrap material by following the pattern shown in figure 2C.
Fig. 2C
The Pushstick should be made of 3/4 or 1/2 inch wood or a thickness less than the width of the
workpiece to be cut.
Figure 2C should be copied and scaled so the grids are 1/2 inch square. This copy can be used
to make your pushstick.
10
UNPACKING AND CHECKING CONTENTS Fig. 3=1
The table saw is a heavy machine, two people are

required to unpack and lift the table saw.
This table saw will require some amount of assembly.
The table saw and fence is shipped in one carton. This
carton also contains a box of saw parts.
1. Remove parts from all of the cartons and lay them
on a clean work surface.
2. Two or more people are required to lift the table
saw off of the shipping pallet.
3. Remove any protective materials and coatings from
all of the parts and the table saw. The protective
coatings can be removed by spraying WD-40 on \
them and wiping it off with a soft cloth. This may \
o
need redone several times before all of the protec- \ \
o
tive coatings are removed completely.
CAUTION: DO NOT use acetone, gasoline or lacquer thin-
ner to remove any protective coatings on your table saw.
4. After cleaning, apply a good quality paste wax to 2
any unpainted surfaces. Make sure to buff out the 12
wax before assembly.
\
5. Compare the items to figures below; verify that all \
\
\
\
items are accounted for before discarding the ship- \
\
\
ping box. If there are any missing parts, call \
\
\
Customer Helpline 1-800-897-7709.
\
\
\
11 \
\
\
The right extension wing must be completely assem-

bled and motor cover closed and fastened before table
saw is to be connected to the power source.
10
If any parts are missing, do not attempt to plug in the
power cord and turn "ON" the table saw. The table saw
can only be turned "ON" after all the parts have been
obtained and installed correctly.
TABLE SAW
1. Table saw assembly
2. Extension wing, cast iron (2)
3. Handwheel (2)
4. Handwheel lock knob (2) 14
5. Splitter mounting rod
6. Splitter bracket assembly
15
7. Wrench hook
9. Fence hook (2)
10. Polly-V belt
11. Blade guard and splitter assembly
12. Dust Port
13. Leg assembly (2)
14. Tie bar (2)
15. Dust Chute
16. Switch
17. Saw blade (not shown)
11
Fig. 3=2
21
2O 23 24
FENCE 22
20. Auxiliary fence
21. Rip fence assembly
22. Fence front rail, right
23. Fence front rail, left
24. Fence rear rail (2)
25. Clamp knob with special nut (2)
26. Micro-Adjust assembly
27. Fence rear rail connector 27
28. Front rail end cap, right
29. Front rail end cap, left
30. Fence front rail alignment

25 28 29
bar (2) 3O
Fig. 3=3
41
MITER GAUGE
40. Miter gauge
41. Cross cut fence
42. Depth stop
43. Clamp assembly
44. M5 x 20mm Hex socket head

screw (3)
45. M5 Flat washer (3)
46. M5 Square nut (3)
47. Elevating rod
48. Knob (2)
12
Fig. 3-4
GB
GX GAD _W _'_ x t_'_
@
Gx SDC_T GAB _RE W _ x
@
_ci_ rL^l ¥_r
@ Ore, @
©I ©I
RInD GAD _Lr-W_ _W _ x
@ 0===_ @
_D GAD _Lr-l._ _I w _ _ 1_',_ L_ _f_ _ LDL__e _i_"
Hardware packs are not identified or labeled. See hardware

diagram to help in finding the correct part. See figure 3-4.
• Hardware Pack for Extension Wings (#0R92013)

includes: Hardware Pack for Cabinet Legs and Dust Chute
Flat Washer M8 (8) (#0R92019) includes:
Lock Washer M8 (8) Flat Washer M8 (16)
Hex Head Screw M8x1.25 x 30mm (8) Flat Washer 5/16" (8)
Lock Washer M8 (12)
• Hardware Pack for Rear Rail (#0R92016) includes: Lock Washer 5/16" (8)
Flat Washer M8 (8) Hex Head Screw M8x1.25 x 25ram (12)
Lock Washer M8 (6) Carriage Head Screw 5/16-18 x 5/8" (8)
Button Head Cap Screw M8x1.25 x 25mm (4) Hex Nut M8 (8)
Button Head Cap Screw M8x1.25 x 35mm (2) Hex Nut 5/16" (8)
Hex Nut M8 (2)
Hardware for ON/OFF Switch: (Hardware finish is
* Hardware Pack for Front Rail (#0R92017) Black Oxide)
includes: Hex Head Screw M6 x 12mm (2)
Flat Washer M8 (4) Square Nut M6 (2)
Lock Washer M8 (4)
Square Head Screw M8x1.25 x 35mm (4) * Miscellaneous Hardware:
Hex Nut M8 (4) Sheet Metal Screw M4 x 8mm (6)
Sheet Metal Screw M4 x 16mm (4)
13
1
27 2
26 5 4
8
3 9
6 7 11
10
12
25
23
13
22
21 17
2O B
1. Splitter assembly 10. Rear rail 19. Rubber foot
2. Blade guard 11. Auxiliary fence 20. Blade height handwheel

3. Anti-kickback fingers 12. Front rail with scale 21. Handwheel lock knob
4. Blade 13. Micro Adjustment knob 22. Fence hook
5. Align-a-cut insert 14. Rip fence lock handle 23. Bevel handwheel
6. Table surface 15. Motor cover 24. Bevel handwheel lock knob
7. lO-in, cast iron wing 16. Bevel scale 25. On/Off switch
8. Rear fence hold down (not shown) 17.3/4 Cabinet 26. Deluxe Miter gauge
9. Rip fence 18. Cabinet leg 27. Miter gauge groove
14
TOOLS REQUIRED 3, Attach two tie bars (F) inside and between front and
The following tools are needed for assembly and align- rear legs already attached to the cabinet with (G)
ment. Note: Two blade wrenches and five hex wrenches eight 5/16-18 x 5/8" carriage head screws, 5/16" flat
are provided with your table saw. The remaining tools washers, 5/16" lock washers and 5/16-18 hex nuts
are typical shop tools and are not included with your and securely tighten all hardware. See figure 4-1.
table saw.
18mm wrench 8mm wrench DUST CHUTE ASSEMBLY
13mm wrench 3/16-in. hex wrench
10mm wrench #2 Phillips screwdriver
Figure 5=1
D
• The table saw is a heavy machine; two people are A

required for certain assembly operations.
• DO NOT assemble the table saw until you are sure
the tool is unplugged.
the power switch is in the "OFF" position.
• For your own safety, DO NOT connect the machine to
the power source until the machine is completely
assembled and you read and understand the entire
Owner's Manual.
CABINET LEG ASSEMBLY

B
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from C

the power source.
1. Turn the table saw upside down onto its cast iron 1. Attach the dust chute assembly (A) to the bottom of
table. CAUTION: The table saw is heavy; two peo- the table saw cabinet, making sure the opening (B)
ple are required for this operation. Be sure to lay in the dust chute is to the rear of the table saw (C).
cardboard on the floor to protect the table surface. Use (D) four M8 x 25mm hex head screws and M8
lock washers and tighten all hardware. See figure 5-1.
Figure 4=1 2.. Turn the table saw right side up. CAUTION: The
A table saw is heavy; two people are required for this
operation.
E
F A Figure 5=2
2, Attach leg assemblies (A) to the front (B) and rear (C)
of the table saw cabinet by placing (D) eight M8 x _E
25ram hex head screws and eight M8 flat washers
down through the mounting holes in the leg assembly
and cabinet (E). Place an M8 flat washer, M8 lock
washer and M8 hex nut onto each of the eight screws 3. Attach the dust port (E) to the dust chute (F) with
attaching leg assembly to cabinet. Do not completely four 1/4-20 x 3/8" round head tap screws.
tighten hardware at this time. See figure 4-1. See figure 5-2.
15
POLY=V BELT ASSEMBLY 1. CAUTION: The extension wings are heavy; two
people are required to assemble both extension
wings to the table saw.
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from 2. Assemble one of the extension wings (A) to the left
the power source. side of the table saw. Align the four holes (B) in the
Figure 64 extension wing with the four holes in the left side of
the saw table. Use four M8 x 30mm hex head
J
A screws, M8 lock washers and M8 flat washers. Do

not completely tighten hardware at this time. See
figure 7-1.
Figure 7=2
D
E
- c
/4
1. Make sure all packaging material has been

removed from inside the cabinet.
2. Open the motor cover and place the motor Poly-V
belt (A) over the blade pulley (B). See figure 6-1.
3. Carefully lift the motor (C) and place the belt under
the motor pulley (not shown). Make sure all the 3. Lay a straight edge (C) across the saw table (D)
v-notches in the belt are mated with the v-notches and extension wing (E). Make sure that the front
of the blade and motor pulley. See figure 6-1. face of the extension wing (F) is flat to the front
4. Carefully let the motor down and close motor cover. face of the saw table (G). Adjust the extension
wing so that its top surface is exactly flat to the saw
EXTENSION WING ASSEMBLY
table and securely tighten hardware. See figure 7-2.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to assemble the other

MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from extension wing to the right side of the table saw.
the power source.
HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY

bled and motor cover closed and fastened before table MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from
saw is to be connected to the power source. the power source.
Figure 74 Figure 8-1

A
D
C
16
Placeoneofthehandwheels (A)ontotheshaft(B) 1. Assemble both of the fence hooks (A) to the left
ofthebevelshaftlocatedonthesideofthecabinet. side of the cabinet (B) using four M4 x 8mm sheet
Alignthegroove(C)in thebackofthehandwhee[ metal screw, not shown. See figure 9-1.
withthepin(D)throughtheshaft. Seefigure8-1. 2. Assemble the wrench hook (C) above the fence
hooks using two M4 x 8mm sheet metal screws, not
Figure 8=2
shown. See figure 10-1.
E BLADE GUARD AND SPLITTER ASSEMBLY
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from

the power source.
1. Loosen table insert retainer bolt and remove tame
insert.
Figure 10=1
B
2. Thread the locking knob (E) onto the end of the
threaded shaft (F). See figure 8-2.
3. Repeat the steps above to assemble the hand-

wheel and locking knob onto the blade raise/lower
shaft located on the front of the cabinet.
WRENCH AND FENCE HOOK ASSEMBLY
2. Place the threaded end of the mounting splitter rod

(A) through the hole (B) in the rear of the cabinet.
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from Place a M12 hex nut (not shown) onto the threaded
the power source. end of the mounting splitter rod inside of the cabi-
net and tighten securely. See figure 10-1 and 10-2.
Figure 94
Note: Place an 18mm wrench on 12mm hex nut and a
13mm wrench on flats of the splitter rod and tighten.
Figure 10=2
C
/
A
3. Place the splitter bracket assembly (C) onto the

mounting splitter rod. See figure 10-2 and 10-3.
17
Figure 10=3 Figure 10=5
0
H
\ Q
4, Place the front attachment point (D) of the blade 7, Place a square (N) onto the saw table and against
guard and splitter assembly (H) down into the tool- the splitter assembly (0) behind the kickback
less front attachment point (E) and the rear attach- fingers (P). Make adjustments to the splitter
ment slot (F) onto the threads of the splitter bracket bracket assembly (Q) so that the splitter is square
knob (G); securely tighten splitter bracket knob. to the saw table and tighten the two hex socket
Note: The splitter bracket assembly will need to be head screws on the bottom of the splitter bracket
positioned to fit the blade guard and splitter assem- assembly. See figure 10-5.
bly on the mounting splitter rod. See figure 10-3.
5, Remove the hex nut (K) and outer flange (J) from Figure 10=6
the blade arbor (I). Note: The arbor has a right hand
thread; to loosen the hex nut, turn it counterclock-
wise. See figure 10-4.
U
Figure 10=4
8. Lay a straight edge (R) against the left side of the

saw blade (S). Align the splitter (T) so that it is in a
straight line with the blade and tighten the one hex
socket head screws (U) on top of the splitter brack-
et assembly. See figure 10-6.
9. Replace table insert and tighten table insert

6, Place 10" saw blade (H) onto blade arbor (I), make retaining-bolt removed in step 1.
sure the teeth of the blade are pointing down in the
front of the table saw. Place the outer flange (J) 10. If there is any problem with the front splitter attach-
and hex nut (K) onto the blade arbor and snug hex ment bracket being out-of-square to the saw table
nut by hand. Place the open-end blade wrench (L) or blade alignment, see "AMGNING SPMTTER
on the flats of the inner blade flange (not shown) BRACKET" in the Operations and Adjustments sec-
and the box-end blade wrench (M) onto the hex nut tion of this manual.
and securely tighten. Note: The blade arbor has a
right hand thread, to tighten the hex nut turn it
clockwise. See figure 10-4.
18
RiP FENCE ASSEMBLY 5. Slide the heads of four M8 x 35mm square head
screws (F), two from each end of the front rail into
the front rail. Note: The front rail is still positioned
upside down on the saw table. Position the screws
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from so that they will align with the two holes in the front
the power source. of the saw table and one hole in each extension
wing (G). See figure 11-2.
Figure 11-1
6. Place front rail against front of saw table with the
C four screws going through the four holes in the saw
C A table and extension wings. Place an one M8 flat
washer, M8 lock washer and M8 hex nut onto each
of the four screws on the back side of the saw table
and extension wings. Do not completely tighten the
"D four hex nuts at this point.
Figure 11=3
H
E
A
B
1. Alignment bars (B) have set screws (A) already

installed. Make sure set screws are flush with face
of alignment bar. See figure 11-1.
2. Place both fence front rails (C) on the saw table
upside down. Make certain that the right fence rail
is on the right-hand side and the left front rail is on
the left-hand side. Check that both scales on the
front rails have the 1-inch marking close to each
other. See figure 11-1.
3. Insert both alignment bars halfway into the back (D)

and bottom (E) square nut grooves in the right front
rail and slightly snug set screws to hold alignment
bar into the front rail. See figure 11-1.
4. Slide the left front rail onto alignment bars and

against other half of front rail. Make sure both
sections of the front rails are flat and straight to
each other. Slightly snug set screws in both align-
ment bars. Recheck that the front rail is flat and
straight, then securely tighten all set screws.
7, Raise saw blade (H) and place a straight edge (I)
Figure 11=2 against right side of saw blade extending out over
front of saw table. Align the edge of the right front
F
rail (J) with right side of saw blade using the
straight edge. See figure 11-3.
O
G
19
R
K
11. Slide the right side rear rail (T) onto rear rail con-
nector. Assemble the right rear rail with two M8 x
25mm button head cap screws to the saw table and
one M8 x 35mm button head cap screw, M8 flat
8. Using a combination square (K), make sure the washer, M8 lock washer and M8 hex nut to the
front rail (L) is level across the saw table and exten- extension wing. See figure 11-6.
sion wings, and then securely tighten the four hex
12. Using a combination square, make sure the rear rail
nuts. See figure 11-4.
is level to the saw table and extension wings and
below the bottom of the miter gauge slots, then
securely tighten all hardware. See figure 11-4.
Figure 11=5
Figure 11=7 Z
AC U
M Y
/
0 Q
W
V
9. Assemble the left side rear rail (M) to the left rear
side of the table saw (N). Attach rear rail (M) to
13. Assemble the two cursors (U) to the rip fence
table (N) with two M8 x 25mm button head cap
assembly (V) using four M5 x 16mm pan head
screws, M8 Iockwashers, and M8 flat washers (0).
screws and M5 lock washers (W). See figure 11-7.
Attach rear rail to extension wing with one M8 x
35mm button head cap screw, M8 flat washer, M8 14. Lift up on the rip fence handle (X) and place the
Iockwasher and M8 hex nut (P). Make sure that fence down onto the saw table with the fence body
the rear rail is below the bottom of the miter gauge into front rail. With the rip fence lock handle up, you
slots (R) in the saw table. See figure 11-5 and can slide the fence back and forth across the saw
11-6. table. Pushing the rip fence lock handle down will
lock the fence from moving. See figure 11-7.
10. Slide rear rail connector (S) into the left rear rail
15. Align left fence side (AB) at a distance from the
already assembled. See figure 11-5.
right side (AC) of the right miter gauge groove and
lock the fence. See figure 11-7.
16. Use a measuring tape to measure the distance from
the saw blade right side to the left fence side.
20
17.Assemblethecursor(U)to the rightsideoffence AUXILIARY FENCE ASSEMBLY
crossarmwithtwoM5x 16mmpanheadscrews
andM5lockwashers(W).Donotcompletely tight-
enscrews.Seefigure11-7.
18.Aligncursorwiththescale(Z)sothatthethinblack ALWAYS position auxiliary fence at least 2-inches in
line(Y)is onthesamenumberasthedistance front of the saw blade when using auxiliary fence as a
stop when crosscutting.
measuredinstep16.Tightenthecursorscrews.
19.Removefencefromtableandreposition iton left Figure 13=1
sideof sawblade.Alignrightfencesideat a dis- D
tancefromthe leftsideof leftmitergaugegroove B
andlockthefence.
20.Usea measuring tapetomeasurethedistancefrom
thesawbladeleftsidetothe rightfenceside.
21.Assemblethesecondcursorto leftsideoffence A
andM6lockwashers.Donotcompletely tighten
screws.
22.Aligncursorwiththescaleso thatthethinblackline
is onthesamenumberasthedistancemeasured in
step20.Tightenthecursorscrews.
Figure 11=8
AA
1, To attach the auxiliary fence (A) to the main fence
assembly (B), thread two clamp knobs (C) through
the top of the auxiliary fence and into a special
1/4-20 square nut, not shown. See figure 13-1.
2, Slide the special square nuts into the top of the

fence (D). Slide auxiliary fence into position and
tighten clamp knobs.
3, For correct use, see "USING AUXILIARY FENCE

ON RIP FENCE" in the "OPERATION AND
23. Note: The rip fence comes with a rear hold-down
ADJUSTMENTS section.
(AA) built into the end of the fence, to keep the rear
of the fence from lifting while using a feather board.
To engage the rear hold-down, simply flip down on
the hold down arm so that it is under the rear rail,
as shown. See figure 11-8.
24. Check and make sure the rip fence is square to the
saw table and is parallel to the miter groove. If any
adjustments are needed see "FENCE ADJUST-
MENTS" in the Operation and Adjustments section
in this manual.
21
ON/OFF SWITCH AND 5. Place the left front rail end cap (A) into the end of
END CAP ASSEMBLY the front rail (B). Attach end cap to rail with two
M4 x 16mm pan head self-tapping screws (C).
See figure 14-2.
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from 6. Repeat step above to attach right side front rail
the power source. end cap.
CONNECTING SWITCH CORD

Figure 14=1 TO MOTOR CORD

the power source.
Figure 15-1
JJ
B
1. Place two M6 x 12mm hex head screws (A) up

through the two holes (B) in the switch support (C).
See figure 14-1.
A
2. Thread two M6 square nuts (D) onto M6 x 12mm hex
head screws about three turns. See figure 14-1. 1. Place the switch cord (A) through hole (B) in front
of cabinet. See figure 15-1.
3. Slide the M6 square nuts and switch assembly (E)
into the left end of the front rail (F). See figure 14-1. 2. Open motor cover, plug switch cord (C) into motor
cord (D). See figure 15-2.
4. Position the switch assembly to desired location
3 Pull slack in switch cord into the cabinet.
and tighten hardware. CAUTION: Keep switch out
of saw blade path. Most common switch location is
to the left side of the saw blade. Figure 15=2
Figure 14=2
3, Pull slack in switch cord into the cabinet.
4. Make a loop (E) from the slack of the switch cord

and place it behind cord retaining bar (F). See
figure 15-2.
22
MITER GAUGE ASSEMBLY Figure 16=2

the power source.
Figure 16=1
4. Slide both of the square nuts with hex socket head

cap screws and flat washer (F) into the lower T-slot
(G) of the cross cut fence (H). See figure 16-2.
5. Place the thread section of the hex socket head
A screws into the grooves (I) of the miter gauge body.
B Make sure the flat washers are against the heads
of the hex socket head cap screws. See figure 16-
Thread elevating rod (A) into the top threaded hole 2.
in the miter gauge body (B). See figure 16-1. 6. Position the cross cut fence so that no part of the
fence is in the path of the saw blade. Allow the
2. Place clamp assembly (C) on top of the miter cross cut fence to rest on the saw table and secure-
gauge knob (D) and elevating rod. Place two
knobs (E) through the slot in the clamp assembly
and thread one knob into the threaded hole in the
miter gauge knob and elevating rod. Position Figure 16=3
clamp assembly as shown and tighten both knobs.
See figure 16-1.
3. Place one M5 flat washer onto one M5 x 20mm hex

socket head cap screw. Thread one M5 square nut
onto the hex socket head cap screw until the screw
is flush with the back of the square nut. Repeat
this for one more flat washer, head socket head cap
screw and square nut.

socket head cap screw (J). Place this through the
hole in the top of the depth stop (K). Thread one
M5 square nut onto the hex socket head cap screw
until the tip of the screw is flush with the back of the
square nut. See figure 16-3.
8. Slide the square nut and depth stop into the top
T-slot (L) of the cross cut fence. See figure 16-3.
9. Position depth stop as desired and tighten the hex
socket head cap screw.
23
BOLTING TABLE SAW TO THE FLOOR

the power source.
If you wish, the table saw can be permanently mounted

to the floor. To attach to the floor, see instructions
below.
Figure 15A=1
Remove the four rubber footpads (A) from the table

saw legs (B). See Figure 15A-1.
2, Position the table saw where you want it perma-

nently mounted.
3, Mark the floor through the holes in the bottom of

legs.
4, Move the table saw out of the way and drill pilot
holes at the four locations marked.
5, Attach the table saw to the floor using appropriate

hardware (not included).
24
CAUTION LOCKING ON/OFF SWITCH
• A separate electrical circuit should be used for your 1. When the table saw is not in use, the "ON" button
table saw. The table saw comes pre-wired for 120-volt should be locked so that it cannot be started.
use. The circuit should not be less than #14 AWG wire
2. Using the padlock included with your table saw, lift
and should be protected with a 15-amp time lag fuse.
the "red "OFF" paddle and place the padlock
• Have a qualified electrician repair or replace damaged through the holes (C) in the side of the "ON" button
or worn cord immediately. and then lock the padlock. Make sure keys have
• Before connecting the motor to the power line, make been removed from padlock and placed where no
certain the switch is in the "OFF" position and be sure children can get them. See figure 17-1.
that the electric current is of the same characteristics 3. To use the table saw, unlock and remove the pad-
as the motor nameplate. All line connections should lock from the "ON" button.
make good contact.
• Running on low voltage or long extension cords will
damage the motor. THERMAL=OVERLOAD PROTECTION
• DO NOT expose the table saw to rain or operate the • Turn the power switch "OFF" and unplug the power
in damp locations. cord from its power source prior to doing or perform-
ing any maintenance.
• MAKE SURE all parts have been assembled correctly
Make certain that the OFF button has been de-
and are in working order.
pressed before pushing the thermal-overload-reset
• KEEP table surface clear of tools and debris before button.
starting table saw.
The motor supplied with your table saw has a resettable
STARTING AND STOPPING THE SAW thermal-overload relay (D), see figure 17-1. If the motor
shuts off during an operation (cutting a workpiece too
Figure 17=1 fast or using a dull blade, using the saw beyond its
capacity, or low voltage) press the OFF button, let the
motor cool three to five minutes. Push the reset ther-
Y mal-overload button on the side of the ON/OFF switch
assembly. Make certain that the saw blade and work
• C
area has been cleared of debris before restarting saw.
The motor can now be turned on again.
L ON
RAISING AND LOWERING THE BLADE
A
Figure 18=1
1. The ON/OFF switch is located under the front rail

on the table saw.
2. To turn the table saw on, press the green "ON"
button (A) in one-half inch. Note: There is a safety The blade height adjustment handwheel and handwheel
feature on the switch to insure that the switch must lock knob is located on the front of the cabinet above
be completely pressed before the saw will START. the blade bevel scale. To raise the saw blade, loosen
See figure 17-1. the handwheel lock knob (A) (counter-clockwise) and
3. To turn the table saw off, press the large red "OFF" turn the handwheel (B) clockwise. When the saw blade
paddle (B) or lift the paddle and press directly on is at its desired height, tighten the handwheel lock knob
the red "OFF" button. See figure 17-1. (clockwise) until it is securely tightened. See figure 18-1.
25
Tolowerthesawblade,loosenthehandwheel lock 3. If the blade will not tilt to 90-degree, turn (counter-
knob(counterclockwise) andturnthe handwheel clockwise) the set screw (C) in the left hand side of
counterclockwise. Whenthesawbladeisat itsdesired the saw table until the blade can be positioned to
height,tightenthehandwheel lockknob(clockwise) 90-degrees. Tighten bevel handwheel lock knob,
untilit issecurelytightened. located on the left side of the cabinet. This will keep
the blade from further tilting and check that the set
TILTING THE BLADE screw is contacting positive stop. See figure 19-1.
The blade bevel handwheel and handwheel lock knob
4. If the blade has been tilted to 90-degrees, tighten
is located on the left side of the cabinet. To increase
bevel handwheel lock knob, located on the left side
the saw blade-bevel, loosen the handwheel lock knob
of the cabinet. This will keep the blade from further
(A) (counterclockwise) and turn the handwheel (B)
clockwise. When the saw blade is at its desired tilting. Turn the set screw clockwise until it comes
in contact with the positive stop.
degree, tighten the handwheel lock knob (clockwise)
until it is securely tightened. See figure 18-1
To return the saw blade bevel to zero degrees, loosen Figure 19=2
the handwheel lock knob (counterclockwise) and turn
the handwheel counterclockwise. When the saw blade
is back to zero degrees it will come into contact with the
adjustable positive stop which will cause the blade to
stop. Tighten the handwheel lock knob (clockwise) until
it is securely tightened.
To tilt the blade bevel to 45-degrees, loosen the hand-

wheel lock knob (counterclockwise) and turn the hand-
wheel clockwise. When the saw blade is at 45-degrees
it will come into contact with the adjustable positive stop
which will cause the blade to stop, tighten the hand-
wheel lock knob (clockwise) until it is securely tightened.
ADJUSTING BLADE BEVEL

POSITIVE STOPS
Figure 19=1
5. To adjust blade 45-degree blade bevel positive stop,

A raise the saw blade to its highest position.
6. Using a combination square (D) check that the
blade is 45-degrees to the saw table (45-degrees
on bevel scale). See figure 19-2.
7. If the blade will not tilt to 45-degrees, turn (counter-
clockwise) the set screw (E) in the right hand side
of the saw table until the blade can be positioned to
45-degrees. Tighten bevel handwheel lock knob,
located on the left side of the cabinet. This will keep
screw is contacting positive stop. See figure 19-2.

tilting. Turn the set screw clockwise until it comes
1. To adjust blade 90-degree blade bevel positive stop, in contact with the positive stop.
raise the saw blade (A) to its highest position. See
figure 19-1.
BEVEL ARROW ADJUSTMENT
2. Using a combination square (B) check that the
1. Make certain that the blade is at 90-degrees to the
blade is 90-degrees to the saw table (zero degrees
table surface with a combination square. See
figure 19-1.
26
Fig. 20=1 1. Raise the saw blade to its highest point.
C 2. Place a combination square (A) on the saw table

with one edge (B) of the square against the left
\/ miter slot (C). See Figure 20A-1.
3. Adjust the square so the rule (D) just touches the
saw blade about 1 inch in from the outer diameter.
Make sure the rule is not touching any of the car-
bide tips of the saw blade.
4. Lock the rule in this position.

5. This dimension should be around 5-1/2 inch, plus or
minus 3/32 of an inch.
Figure 20A=2
2. Check that the bevel arrow (A) is pointing to the

zero degree mark on the bevel scale (B) located on
the front of the cabinet. See figure 20-1.
3. To adjust arrow, loosen the Philips head screw (C)

and reposition the bevel arrow and tighten screw.
See figure 20-1.
BLADE HEEL ALIGNMENT
CHECKING BLADE ALIGNMENT
Blade heel is the misalignment of the blade to the miter

slots. This means when the blade is not parallel to the
miter slots it is heeling. The blade is set parallel at the
factory and should not need any adjustments. You can
check this by using a dial indicator (not included) or a
combination square (not included). It is recommended 6. Rotate the saw blade back so that you take the
to check the alignment before initial operation as fol- measurement from the same spot on the saw
lows: blade. See Figure 20A-2.
7. Take a reading at the rear of the blade (E) with the

combination square. If there is a difference of more
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from than four pieces of standard printer paper between
the rule and the blade then adjustment will have to
the power source. be made.
Figure 20A=1 8, If an adjustment is necessary see "ADJUSTING

BLADE ALIGNMENT".
ADJUSTING BLADE ALIGNMENT
f
Blade alignment is factory set and should not need
adjustment. All saw blades have some runout.
Therefore, readjusting the blade alignment should only
be attempted if it becomes necessary (see checking
blade alignment).

the power source.
A
27
Figure 20B=1 RIP FENCE OPERATIONS
AND ADJUSTMENTS
\

the power source.
The rip fence can be used on either side of the saw

blade. The most common location is on the right hand
side. This fence is a front locking fence, meaning it
only clamps on the front rail. The fence slides across
the front and rear rails.
Figure 21=1
B
C G D F
1. To align the blade parallel to the miter slot, first

loosen two hex head screws (A) under the left side
of the table saw. This is the same side as the bevel
handwheel (B). See figure 20B-1.
Figure 20B=2
c C
H
E
1. To move the rip fence, lift up on the fence handle

(A) and slide the fence back and forth across the
saw table. Note: The fence handle is spring loaded
and will stay in the up position until press down on.
See figure 21-1.
2. To lock the fence from sliding side to side, push
down on the fence handle.
2. Open motor cover located on the right side of the ADJUSTING FENCE SLIDE
table saw. Loosen two hex head screws (C) locat-
ed directly above the opening. See Figure 20B-2.
3. The saw table is now loose and can be reposi-
tioned until the blade is parallel to the miter slot. MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from
Repeat steps in "CHECKING BLADE ALIGN- the power source.
MENT".
To make sure your fence slides smoothly there are sev-
4. When blade is parallel to miter slot tighten all four eral items to check.
hex head screws.
5. Recheck blade alignment.

6. Tilt the blade to 45 degrees, and rotate the saw
blade by hand. Make sure the blade does not con-
28
Figure 21A-1 Figure 21A=3
B G F
/,
B H
Make sure that the nylon set screws (A) and nylon
glide pads (B) are in place and are not damaged, 3, Make sure there is a consistent gap between the
gouged or have sharp edges. See figure 21A-1. bottom of the fence (F) and the saw table (G). This
Note: Some models do not have the Micro- gap should be same as the thickness of a dime,
Adjustment Assembly as shown in figure 21A-1. around 0.050". To adjust the gap at the front of the
fence turn nylon set screws (H) evenly. See figure
21A-3.
Figure 21A=2
To adjust the gap at the rear of the fence, loosen two
screws (I). The screws are located inside of the fence
end cap (J). The fence hold down (K) will have to be
rotated down to access the two screws. Reposition the
fence end cap to set the gap and tighten the two
screws. See figure 21A-4.
Figure 21A=4
2. Make sure that both the front and rear rails (C) are
parallel to the saw table (D). Use a combination
square (E) to check parallel. See figure 21A-2.
29
Figure 21A-5 ADJUSTING RiP FENCE PARALLEL:
1. To adjust the rip fence parallel to the miter gauge
Clean and wax groove, position the rip fence (B) along the right
side (C) of the right hand miter gauge groove and
lock the fence. The rip fence should be parallel to
the miter gauge groove. If an adjustment is neces-
sary, proceed to the next step. See figure 21-1.
2. Lift the fence handle and slightly loosen hex head
screw (G). Lightly tap on the rear of the fence until
the rip fence is parallel to the miter gauge groove.
Lock the fence and retighten hex head screws.
Unlock the fence and move it side to side. Lock and
recheck it for parallel. See figure 21-1.
ADJUSTING RiP FENCE SQUARE:
1. To adjust the rip fence square to the table surface,

lock the fence in place and place a square on the
saw table and against the side of the rip fence. If the
MAKE CERTAIN you read and follow all directions and rip fence is out-of-square, proceed to the next step.
warnings on the cleaner. 2. Unlock the rip fence handle and adjust one or both
set screws (H) to make the rip fence square to the
4. Clean the front and rear rail with rubbing alcohol or saw table. Lock the rip fence handle and recheck.
automotive brake cleaner. Make sure not to get
CAUTION
cleaner on any painted surfaces. After cleaning,
wax the entire front and rear rail. For models that Keep about 1mm gap between saw table and
bottom of fence. Ten sheets of printer paper are
have the Micro-Adjustment assembly, do not wax
about lmm. See figure 21-1.
the area of the front rail where the rubber wheel
from the micro-adjust contacts. ADJUSTING CLAMPING PRESSURE:
1. After the rip fence is parallel to the miter gauge

ADJUSTING RiP SCALE groove, check to see if there is adequate clamping
force to hold the rip fence in place. If you can lift
1. To adjust the right scale, align left fence side (B) at
a distance from the right side (C) of the right miter the rip fence up off the front rail while it is locked, it
needs adjusted.
gauge groove and lock the fence. See figure 21-1.
2. To adjust the clamping pressure of the rip fence,
slightly loosen two hex socket head screws under-
neath fence body (I). To increase clamping pres-
3. Loosen two screws attaching the cursor (E) to the sure turn set screw (J) clockwise; to decrease
right side of fence cross arm. See figure 21-1. clamping pressure turn set screw counterclockwise
and tighten both hex socket head screws. Note:
4. Align cursor with the scale (F) so that the thin black
Only make small adjustments to set screw (J) and
line (D) is on the same number as the distance
recheck. See figure 21-1.
measured in step 4. Tighten the cursor screws.
5. To adjust the left scale, remove fence from table Figure 21=2
and reposition it on left side of saw blade. Align
K
right fence side at a distance from the left side of
left miter gauge groove and lock the fence.

the saw blade left side to the right fence side.
7. Loosen two screws attaching the cursor to the left
side of fence cross arm.
8. Align cursor with the scale so that the thin black line
is on the same number as the distance measured in
step 6. Tighten the cursor screws.
The rip fence must be properly aligned to the miter gauge

groove in order to prevent "kickback" when ripping.
30
REARHOLD-DOWN CAUTION
It is necessary when performing special operations
Tominimizetheamountthe rearofthefence(K) such as moulding, to add wood facing (A) to one or
comesoffthesawtable,simplyflipdowntherear both sides of the rip fence (B). A 3/4-inch facing to the
holddown(L)sothatit is underthe rearrail.This
limitstheamountthattherearofthefencewilllift. rip fence is suitable for most work although an occa-
sional job may require 1-inch facing. See figure 22-2.
Seefigure21-2.
CAUTION
USING AUXiLiARY FENCE ON RiP FENCE
A wood facing should be used when ripping thin materi-
al such as paneling to prevent the material from catch-
ing between the bottom of the rip fence and saw table
• MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from surface.
the power source.
• TO AVOID KICKBACK always position auxiliary

fence at least 2-inches in front of the saw blade when RiP FENCE MICRO=ADJUSTMENT
being used as a stop for crosscutting.
• Never use the aluminum auxiliary fence while

performing a molding cutter head or dado operation. MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from
A wooden auxiliary fence (not included) must be used the power source when making adjustments.
for these operations.

A
1. Note: When using the auxiliary fence supplied with

your saw you must subtract 1" from the rip scale.
This is because the auxiliary fence is 1-inch thick.
2. When using the auxiliary fence as a cut-off stop,

first assemble auxiliary fence to the rip fence.
3. Position the beginning of the auxiliary fence (A) at

least 2-inches in front of the saw blade (B) and
tighten both clamp knobs (C). See figure 22-1.
4. If using the rip scale to set the cut length, subtract 1. Make sure the rip fence is not locked.
1" from the rip scale for the finish cut measurement.
2. To engage the micro-adjustment, push in knob (A).
Make sure rip fence is locked before any cuts are
See figure 23-1.
made.
3. Turn knob clockwise to move the rip fence to the
Fig. 22=2 left and counter-clockwise to move it to the right.
A
31
TABLE iNSERT ADJUSTMENT Figure 25=1
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from A

the power source when making adjustments. C /
Figure 24=1
B
"A
1. The table insert (A) must always be level with the 1. Make sure switch is "OFF" and disconnect power
saw table (B). To adjust the table insert, loosen cord from power source.
and remove table insert retaining bolt (C). See
figure 24-1. 2. Open motor cover and verify on the motor tag (A)
that motor is dual voltage. See figure 25-1.
2. Place a straight edge across the front and rear of
the table insert. Check that the insert is perfectly 3. If motor tag states that it is dual voltage remove junc-
level with the saw table. tion box cover (B) on motor (C). See figure 25-1.
3. To level the table insert, turn the one or more
adjusting set screws (D) as needed and recheck. 4. Using wiring diagram on inside of junction box
See figure 24-1. cover, reconnect motor leads for 240-volt operation.
4. Once the insert is level, secure the insert with the 5. Replace junction box cover and close motor cover.
retaining bolt removed in step 1.
6. Replace 120 volt plug with a UL/CSA Listed 240
5. The table insert is equipped with a finger hole (E)
volt plug rated for current of the motor.
for easy removal. See figure 24-1.
7. The ON/OFF switch is 4-pole and does not need
CHANGING MOTOR VOLTAGE modified.
• MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from

the power source before working on motor.
• Have a certified electrician make all electrical connec-
tions. All local and state codes must be maintained.
The motor supplied with the table saw is a dual voltage

120/240-volt, single phase motor. The motor is wired
from the factory for 120-volt operation. To change to
240-volt operation for your table saw, proceed with the
following instructions. It is also necessary to replace
the 120 volt plug, supplied with the table saw, with a
UL/CSA Listed plug (not included) suitable for 240 volts
and the rated current of the motor. The table saw with a
240 volt plug should only be connected to an outlet
having the same configuration as the plug. No adapter
is available or should be used with the 240 volt plug.
32
CHANGING THE SAW BLADE Figure 26A=1
• Turn the power switch "OFF" and unplug the power

cord from its power source when changing the saw
blade.
• USE ONLY 10-in. diameter blades with 5/8-in. arbor

holes, rated at or higher than 3800 R.P.M.
Figure 26=1
E
B
1. To adjust front splitter bracket (A), loosen the two

hex socket head cap screws (B). See Fig 26A-1.
1. Remove blade guard and splitter. Figure 26A=2

2. Remove the table insert retaining bolt and remove
the table insert.
3. Unlock the raise/lower handwheel lock and raise
saw blade to maximum height.
4. Two wrenches are supplied with the table saw.
Place one open-end wrench (A) on the flat of the
\
saw arbor to keep it from turning. Place the closed-
end wrench (B) on the arbor nut (C). Turn the arbor
nut wrench toward the front of saw to loosen it.
Remove arbor nut, blade flange (D) and saw blade \
\
(E). See figure 26-1. \
\.
5. Assemble the new saw blade, make certain the
teeth point down at the front of the saw table and
assemble the blade flange and arbor nut. With
\
both blade wrenches as previously mentioned, \
tighten arbor nut in the opposite direction from
which it was loosened.
6. Replace table insert and tighten the table insert 2. Place a straight edge(C) along the left side of blade
retaining bolt. (D) and adjust the front splitter bracket to align the
splitter (E) with the blade. See figure 26A-2.
7. Replace blade guard and splitter.
3. Retighten the two hex socket head cap screws after
ALIGNING SPLITTER BRACKET the splitter has been aligned.
4. If necessary, adjust the rear splitter bracket (F)

make certain that entire splitter is in line with the
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from saw blade. See figure 26A-2.
the power source. 5. Recheck to make certain the splitter is still square
to the saw table. If adjustments are necessary, see
BLADE GUARD AND SPMTTER ASSEMBLY.
33
MITER GAUGE OPERATION 7. Push in plunger and make adjustments to stop
AND ADJUSTMENT screw (G) so that it touches the plunger and tighten
lock nut. See figure 27-2.
8. Recheck the positive stop angle to the saw blade.

MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from Insert the guide bar into the miter gauge groove
the power source when making adjustments. and slide the miter gauge up to the saw blade.
9. To check, place a square against the saw blade

Figure 27=1 and miter gauge body. If any more adjustments are
need repeat steps above.
10. To set both 45-degree positive stops, repeat steps
above.
CLAMP AND FENCE STOP OPERATION
C E MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from

the power source when making adjustments.
1. The miter gauge has adjustable positive stops at
O-degree and plus or minus 45-degrees or it can be Figure 28=1
E
manually set at any angle between plus or minus
60-degrees.
2. To rotate miter gauge body (A), loosen knob (B) and

pull out plunger (C) and rotate miter gauge body to B C
3.
desired angle and tighten knob. See figure 27-1.
To rotate to the next positive stop pull plunger out,

\
rotate miter gauge body then push plunger back in
and continue rotating miter gauge body until it stops
against next positive stop.
4. To adjust O-degree positive stops, loosen knob, pull

out on plunger and turn miter gauge over.
Figure 27=2 D
D
1. The stock clamp (A) can be positioned in and out
by loosening the two knobs (B) and sliding the
clamp body in or out. Retighten knobs when at
desired position. See figure 28-1.
2. The stock clamp has a quick release allowing you

to quickly position the clamp up or down. To
engage quick release press up on trigger (C) and
hold. The clamping pad (D) will fall or it can be
lifted. To release let go of the trigger. Now you
can turn knob (E) to apply clamping pressure.
See figure 28-1.
3. The fence stop (F) can be reposition along the

fence by loosening the hex socket head screw (G).
5, Loosen the lock nut (D) 3 or 4 turns. See figure 27-2. Slide the fence stop to desired position and tighten
6. Place a square against the guide bar (E) and front hex socket head screw. If the fence stop is not
of the miter gauge body (F). Square the miter needed, it can be stored out of the way on the
gauge body to the guide bar and tighten knob. backside of the fence. See figure 28-1.
See figure 27-1.
34
CROSS CUTTING Figure 29=2
Crosscutting requires the use of the miter gauge (A) to
position and guide the workpiece (B). See figure 24-1.
The use of non-Craftsman attachments and acces-

sories may result in risk of injury or damage to the
table saw.
Figure 29=1
D A
AUXILIARY FENCE
For added safety and convenience, the miter gauge can
be fitted with an auxiliary fence (E) if not already sup-
plied with one. If the auxiliary fence is not provided with
your saw, one can be purchased as an accessory or
one can be made from a dimensional piece of hard-
wood. This auxiliary fence can be fastened to the front
of the miter gauge by using two screws (not included)
through the slots (not shown) in the miter gauge body.
See figure 29-2.
Figure 29=3
TO CROSSCUT:
1. Place the workpiece against the miter gauge and
advance both the miter gauge and workpiece
toward the saw blade (C). See figure 29-1.
. K /
Note: The miter gauge may be used in either one of
the miter gauge grooves. When bevel cutting (blade
tilted), use the right hand miter gauge groove so that the
Made tilts away from the miter gauge and your hands.
2. Start the cut slowly and hold the workpiece firmly

against the miter gauge and the table.
To avoid serious injury, NEVER hang onto or touch the

part of the workpiece that is going to be cut off (D). CUT-OFF GAUGE
3. Continue cutting until the workpiece is cut in two. 1. When cross-cutting a number of pieces to the same
4. Slide the miter gauge and workpiece back to the length, clamp a block (F) of wood to the fence (J) to
starting point. use as a cut-off gauge. It is important that this block
of wood always be positioned in front of the saw
NOTE: Before sliding the workpiece back, give the blade. See figure 29-3.
workpiece a little sideways shift to move it slightly away
from the saw blade. CAUTION
When using the block as a cut-off gauge, it is very
important that the rear end of the block be positioned
NEVER pick up any short cut off scrap pieces from the so the workpiece is clear of the block before it enters
table while the saw is running. Wait until the saw blade the blade.
has come to a complete stop.
Never use the fence as a cut-off gauge when crossuctting.
35
Whencross-cutting a numberof piecestothesame and make solid contact with the saw table. The blade
length,a blockofwoodcanbeclampedtothefence guard (B) and splitter assembly (C) must be used. The
andusedas a cut-offgaugeas shown.It is important splitter has anti-kickback fingers (D) to prevent the
thatthisblockof woodalwaysbepositionedinfrontof workpiece from kicking back, and the splitter assembly
thesawbladeas shown.Oncethecut-offlengthis to prevent the wood kerf from closing and binding on
determined, securethefenceandusethemitergauge the blade. See figure 30-1.
tofeedtheworkintotheblade.Thisblockof wood
1. With the workpiece clear of the saw blade, start the
allowsthecut-offpieceto movefreelyalongthetable motor.
surfacewithoutbindingbetweenthefenceandthesaw
table,therebylesseningthepossibility
of kickbackand 2. Place the workpiece on the saw table with the
injurytotheoperator. straight edge against the fence.
Note:Thisblockallowsthecut-offscrappiecetomove 3. Advance the workpiece slowly, holding it down and

against the fence, then into the saw blade.
freelyalongthetablesurfacewithoutbindingbetween
thefenceandtheblade,therebylesseningthepossibil- Note: The workpiece can be fed through the saw blade
ityofkickbackandinjuryto theoperator.
with one or two hands depending on the size.
2, Once the cut-off length is determined, lock the 4. After the workpiece is beyond the saw blade and
fence and slide the workpiece across the table anti-kickback fingers, you can remove your hand
surface until it contacts the block. Use the miter from the workpiece. When this is done, the work-
gauge (K) to feed the workpiece into the blade. piece will either stay on the table, tilt up slightly and
be caught by the rear end of the guard, or slide off
the table to the floor. Alternately, the feed can con-
tinue to the end of the table, after which the work-
To avoid kickback when using the block (F) as a cut-off piece is lifted and brought back along the outside
gauge, it is very important that the rear end of the block edge of the fence.
(G) be positioned so the workpiece (H) is clear of the
5. The cut-off part of the workpiece remains on the
block before it enters the blade (I). Never use the fence
table and is not touched until the saw blade has
(J) as a cut-off gauge when crosscutting. See
figure 29-3. come to a complete stop.
CAUTION
RIPPING
When ripping a workpiece longer than three feet, it is
. NEVER stand in the line of the saw blade path when recommended that the workpiece be supported at the
ripping. rear of the table saw to keep it from falling. A roller
stand can be purchased to support long workpieces to
• ALWAYS keep hands and fingers away from the saw the rear of a table saw.
blade.
CAUTION
If the workpiece is to be cut less than 4-inches wide, a
push stick (E) or guide should always be used to keep
Figure 30=1 your hands away from the saw blade. See figure 30-2.
Figure 30=2
\
C
Ripping is the operation of making a cut with the grain

of the workpiece; the rip fence (A) is used to position An accessory Craftsman Fence Guide can be purchased
and guide the workpiece. Since the workpiece is to assist when making narrow cuts. See "ACCESSOR-
pushed along the fence, it must have a straight edge IES AND ATTACHMENTS" section in this manual.
36
DADO BLADE SET Dado blades and chippers have a set to their teeth. The
teeth of the dado blades and chippers must be
arranged so that the set of each tooth overlaps the next
tooth. The set of the dado blade (C) and chipper (D)
The blade guard and splitter assembly cannot be used overlap as shown in Figure 31-3. A shim (E) can be
when dadoing or molding and must be swung to the used as needed to control the exact width of a dado.
rear of the saw. Blade guard must be reassembled See figures 31-2 and 31-3.
when finished dadoing or molding.
Figure 31=3
Figure 31=1 B
....-D
/
©
When the dado blade width is 13/16-inch, the outside
arbor flange (F) cannot be used. Only the arbor nut (G)
should be used; tighten the arbor nut against the dado
A blade body. Do not lose the outside arbor flange, for it
will be needed when reattaching a blade to the saw
Dadoing is cutting a non-through cut that produces a arbor. Also, an accessory dado blade table insert (H)
square notch into the workpiece. Most dado blade sets (not included) must be used in place of the standard
(not included) are made up of two outside dado blades table insert. See figure 31-4.
(A) and four or five inside chippers (B). Shims (E) can
be placed between blades and chippers to slightly vary
the width of a dado. No more than two shims should be Figure 31=4
placed together between one set of blades or chippers.
Shims can be made of heavy paper, brass or metal.
Various combinations of the dado blades and chippers
are used to cut grooves from 1/8" to 13/16" for use in
shelving, making joints, tenons, grooving, etc. See
figures 31-1,31-2, and 31-3.
Figure 31=2
H o
(NOT INCLUDED)
The blade guard and splitter assembly cannot be used

when dadoing and must be swung to the rear of the
saw.
37
Figure 31=5
• The blade guard and splitter assembly cannot be

used when dadoing or molding and must be swung to
the rear of the saw. Blade guard must be reassem-
bled when finished.
Figure 32=2
\o
\
Figure 31-5, shows a typical dado operation using the

miter gauge.
• Never use the dado head in a bevel position.
• Always install blade guard and splitter assembly after

dado operation is completed.
Figure 32-2 shows the molding cutterhead is assembled

MOLDING HEAD CUTTER to the saw arbor as shown.
Molding is cutting a shape on the edge or face of the
workpiece. Cutting moldings with a molding cutterhead If the outside arbor flange (D) cannot be used with the
(not included) on the circular saw is a fast, safe and molding cutterhead, tighten the arbor nut (E) against
clean operation. The many different knife shapes avail- the cutterhead body. Do not lose the outside arbor
able make it possible for the operator to produce almost flange, for it will be needed when reattaching a blade to
any kind of molding, such as various styles of corner the saw arbor. Also, an accessory molding cutterhead
moulds, picture frames, table edges, etc. table insert (F) (not included) must be used in place of
the standard table insert. See figure 32-2.
Figure 32=1
Figure 32=3
B
G
The molding head consists of a cutterhead (A) in which

It is necessary when using the molding cutterhead to
you can mount various shapes of steel knives (B).
add a wood facing (G) to the face of the rip fence (H).
Each of the three knives in a set is fitted into a groove
The wood facing is attached to the fence with fasteners.
in the cutterhead and securely clamped with a screw.
A 3/4-inch facing is suitable for most work although
The knife grooves (C) should be kept free of sawdust,
an occasional job may require 1-inch facing. See
which would prevent the cutter from seating properly.
figure 32-3.
See figure 32-1.
38
Positionthewoodfacingoverthecutterheadwiththe CAUTION
cutterheadbelowthesurfaceofthetable. Turnthesaw
When molding end grain, the miter gauge must be
onandraisethecutterheadslowly.Thecutterheadwill used. The feed should be slowed up at the end of
cutitsowngrooveinthewoodfacing. the cut to prevent splintering
In all cuts, pay attention to the grain, making the cuts

in the same direction as the grain whenever possible.
• Neverusemoldingcutterhead in a bevelposition.
Neverruntheworkpiece betweenthefenceandthe
moldingcutterhead
as irregularshapedwoodwill
causekickback.
BACKLASH ADJUSTMENTS FOR PROTECTING CAST IRON TABLE

BLADE RAISING/LOWERING AND FROM RUST
BLADE TiLTiNG ASSEMBLIES
If any play is detected in the blade raising/lowering or

blade tilting assemblies, the following adjustments MAKE CERTAIN to turn the power "OFF" and unplug
should be made. the power cord from its power source.
The environment and frequency of human contact can

have a very detrimental impact on unpainted cast iron
surfaces. Moisture, humidity and oils (from human
Turn the power switch "OFF" and unplug the power hands!) can cause the unpainted cast iron surfaces to
cord from its power source when making adjustments. mar or rust, so it is important to conduct routine mainte-
nance to keep your table saw looking new. Cleaning
NOTE: In the illustration below, the table saw has been and waxing the cast iron surfaces on a regular mainte-
turned upside down and the blade removed for clarity. nance schedule is recommended as follows:
To clean and maintain the unpainted cast iron sur-

faces:
Figure 33=1
Apply a heavy coat of WD-40 onto the unpainted cast
c iron surface.
Use a fine steel wool pad to buff the unpainted cast

iron. Make sure to buff in a "front to rear" direction
only. A side-to-side buffing motion will show in the
finely ground cast iron as a flaw, defect or scratches.
Reapply WD-40 and buff the unpainted cast iron sur-

faces until the stains or rust is removed. Make sure
you use the same front-to-rear buffing direction to
avoid scratching or marring the cast iron surface.
After all stains and/or rust have been removed, clean

all oil and dirt from the table saw using a soft cloth or
B A rag.
Lastly, you need to apply a good automotive paste

1, To adjust the blade raising/lowering assembly, wax to all unpainted cast iron surfaces. This will help
loosen lock-nut (A) and turn the eccentric sleeve to protect the saw from rusting from further contact
(B) until all play is removed in the assembly, then with moisture or oily hands.
tighten lock-nut. See figure 33-1
2, To adjust the blade tilting assembly, loosen lock-nut

(C) and turn the eccentric (D) until all play is
removed in the assembly, then tighten the lock-nut.
See figure 33-1.
39
LUBRiCATiON
The table saw has sealed lubricated bearings in the

Only trained personnel should perform repairs to the
motor housing that do not require any additional lubrica-
table saw. Contact your nearest Sears Service Center
tion from the operator.
for authorized service. Unauthorized repairs or replace-
ment with non-factory parts could cause serious injury
CLEANING to the operator and damage to the table saw.
With the table saw unplugged, blow off motor with low-
pressure air to remove dust or dirt. Air pressure above
50 R S. I. should not be used as high-pressured air
may damage insulation. The operator should always
wear eye protection when using compressed air.
Do not allow chips and dust to accumulate under table

saw. Keep area clean and in safe order.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE MATERIALS

to clean table saw.
40
TOPREVENT
INJURYTOYOURSELF or damage to the table saw, turn the power switch to the "OFF" position and
unplug the power cord from the electrical receptacle before making any adjustments.
PROBLEM LIKELY CAUSE(S) SOLUTION
Motor does not 1, Switch not pressed in far enough or switch 1, Depress switch in 1/2 inch or make sure switch is in the
start: in the "OFF" position. "ON" position.
2. Defective switch. 2. Have switch replaced.
3. Defective capacitor. 3. Have capacitor replaced.
4. Low line voltage. 4. Correct low line voltage condition. If saw is plugged into an
extension cord, plug saw directly into wall outlet.
5. Defective motor. 5. Have motor replaced.
NOTE: 3 and 4 must be done by a qualified service
technician.
Motor stalls, 1. Circuit overload. 1. Reduce circuit load (turn off other appliances)
thermal-overload
2. Low line voltage. 2. Correct low line voltage condition. Check line voltage with a
trips or circuit multi-meter. If saw is plugged into an extension cord,
breakers open unplug saw from extension cord and plug saw directly to
frequently: wall outlet.
3. Motor overload. 3. Reduce load on motor, slow down feed rate of workpiece
being pushed into blade.
4. Incorrect fuses on circuit breakers. 4. Have correct fuses on circuit breakers installed by a quali-
fied electrician.
5. Short circuit in motor; loose connections or 5. Inspect terminals in motor for damaged insulation and
worn insulation on lead wires. shorted wires and have them replaced. Check all power
lead connections.
Motor starts 1. Low line voltage. 1. Correct low line voltage condition. Check line voltage with a
slowly or fails to multi-meter. If saw is plugged into an extension cord,
come to full speed: unplug saw from extension cord and plug saw directly to
wall outlet.
2. Defective motor windings. 2. Have motor replaced.
3. Defective capacitor. 3. Have capacitor replaced
Motor running too 1. Restricted air circulation due to dust 1. Clean dust and restore normal air circulation around motor.
hot: accumulation. 2. Reduce load on motor.
2. Motor overload.
Handwheels are hard 1. Handwheel Lock Knob has not been loosened. 1. Loosen Handwheel Lock Knob.
to turn: 2. Dust accumulation on tilting or beveling gears 2. Clean off tilt and bevel gear assemblies.
inside of cabinet.
Miter gauge does not 1. Miter gauge groove and miter gauge bar are 1. Clean miter gauge groove and bar.
move smoothly: dirty. 2. Adjust set-screws in miter gauge bar.
2. Set-screws in miter gauge bar are out of
adjustment.
Workpiece binds, 1. Blade is dull. 1. Sharpen or replace blade.

burns or stalls motor
2. Board is warped or twisted. 2. Replace board.
when ripping:
3. Rip fence is not parallel to blade. 3. See "Fence Alignment" in Operation and Adjustment
Section.
Saw blade does not 1. Blade is dull. 1. Sharpen or replace blade.

cut true at 90 or 45
2. Indicator arrow is not properly adjusted. 2. Adjust bevel indicator arrow.
degrees:
3. Positive stops are not set properly. 3. Adjust 90 and 45-degree positive stops.
Rip fence does not 1. Rip fence is not mounted properly. 1. See "Fence Alignment" in Operation and Adjustment Section.
move smoothly: 2. Rails are dirty or sticky. 2. Clean and apply paste wax to rails.
Saw vibrates 1. Blade is warped. 1. Replace blade.

excessively: 2. Drive belt is damaged. 2. Replace drive belt.
3. Reposition saw on a flat surface. Adjust leveling feet, if
3. Work surface is uneven. supplied with saw.
4. Saw is not mounted securely. 4. Tighten all hardware.
41
1O-IN.TABLESAW MODEL NO.152.221140
When servicing, use only CRAFTSMAN replacement parts. Use of any other parts may create a HAZARD or cause
product damage.
Any attempt to repair or replace electrical parts on this table saw may create a HAZARD unless a qualified service
technician does repairs. Repair service is available at your nearest Sears Service Center.
Always order by PART NUMBER, not by key number.
*AVAILABLE AT MOST RETAIL STORES
Key No. PART No. Description Qty. Key No. PART No. Description Qty.
Ref No. Part No. DESCRIPTION GTY 111 STD851004 FLAT WASHER M4 1
N/A OR91551 OWNER'S MANUAL - #22114 10" Table Saw 1 112 OR91774 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 10ram 1
N/A OR91710 BLADE GUARD ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 113 OR91075 CLAMP PAD 1
CONSISTS OF REF #: 1,2, 3, 3a, 3b 4, 5, 6, 7, 16, 24 & 25 N/A 114 OR91076 MITER GAGE BODY 1
N/A OR91711 SPLITTER BRACKET ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 115 OR91077 SPECIAL WASHER, T-SLOT 1
CONSISTS OF REF #: 9, 9a, 10, 11, 12, 13,14, 15 & 17 N/A 116 OR91074 SPECIAL SCREW 1
1 OR91785 PUSH NUT (CHROME) 117 OR91118 SQUARE NUT M6 2
2 OR91781 PIN 118 OR91078 CROSS CUT FENCE 1
3 OR91627 "SEE THRU" BLADE GUARD 119 OR91079 GUIDE BAR 1
3A OR91574 WARNING LABEL 120 OR91763 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M4 x 16ram 4
3B OR91575 WARNING LABEL PICTORAL 121 OR91783 PIN 1/4" x 3/4" 1
4 OR91782 PIN 122 OR91774 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 10ram 2
5 OR91008 GUARD BRACKET 123 OR91080 PLUNGER 1
6 OR91834 PUSH NUT (BLACK) 124 OR91081 PLUNGER BLOCK 1
7 OR91745 GUARD SPRING 125 OR91082 CURSOR 1
8 OR91631 SPLITTER MOUNTING ROD 126 OR91775 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 16ram 1
9 OR91812 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 22ram 127 OR91776 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 20ram 3
9A STD852066 LOCK WASHER M6 127A STD840407 HEX NUT M4 3
10 OR91011 SPLITTER REAR MOUNT LOWER 128 OR91766 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M5 x 20mm 2
11 OR91051 SPLITTER MOUNT SQUARE NUT 2
129 OR91823 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID: 5.3, OD:12, T:1.2)
12 OR91012 SPLITTER REAR MOUNT UPPER 130 OR91573 MITER SCALE
13 OR91820 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:6.4mm, OD:18mm, T:1.6mm) 131 OR91084 SPECIAL WASHER, MITER HANDLE
14 STD852606 LOCK WASHER M6 132 OR91085 MITER GAUGE KNOB
15 OR91758 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 16ram 133 OR91086 ELEVATING ROD
16 OR91015 SPLITTER 134 OR91756 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M5 x 2Omm
17 OR91048 SPLITTER KNOB
134A OR91823 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:5.3, OD:12, T:1.2)
18 OR91760 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 6ram 135 OR91087 DEPTH STOP
19 OR91820 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:6.4mm, OD:18mm, ]_1.6ram) 136 OR91118 SQUARE NUT M5
20 OR91758 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 16ram 200 OR91767 JAM NUT 5/8-18-LH
21 OR91610 SPLITTER FRONT MOUNT 201 OR91020 ARBOR PULLEY
21A OR91791 SPRING PIN 3ram x 10ram 202 OR91824 KEY 5ram x 5ram x 15ram
22 OR91613 SPLITTER SPRING CLIP 203 OR91734 BEARING CLOSURE NUT
23 OR91753 SPECIAL HEX NUT M12 263A OR91732 ARBOR SPACER
24 OR91795 SPRING PIN 4ram x 22ram 264 OR91733 BALL BEARING <6203 LLB>
25 OR91009 ANTI - KICKBACK FINGER 205 OR91004 ELEVATING BRACKET
30 OR91789 SET SCREW 1/4-28 x 3/8", NYLOCK 266 OR91024 ARBOR SLEEVE
31 OR91014 TABLE INSERT - STANDARD 267 OR91801 WAVE WASHER <BWW 6203>
32 OR91652 TABLE INSERT RETAINING BOLT 208 OR91733 BALL BEARING <6203 LLB>
33 OR91815 TABLE 209 OR91022 ARBOR SHAFT
34 OR91821 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M8 x 20ram
210A OR91720 10" BLADE, 40 TOOTH, A.T.B., 5/6" BORE
35 OR91621 ALIGN-A-CUT INSERT 211 OR91026 BLADE FLANGE
36 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 212 OR91050 BLADE HEX NUT-RH
37 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 213 STD836045 HEX HEAD SCREW M16x1.5 x 45mm 2
38 STD835030 HEX HEAD SCREW M8x1.25 x 30mm 214 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M10 2
39B OR91093 EXTENSION WING 10" CAST IRON 215 OR91003 REAR BRACKET 1
40 OR91817 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER 216 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M1O 2
41 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 217 STD852010 LOCK WASHER M1O 2
42 STD835025 HEX HEAD SCREW M8x1.25 x 25mm 218 STD841015 HEX NUT M1Oxl.5 2
60 OR91046 SWITCH PADDLE 1
220 OR91721 BELT (28" 6Rib Jsection PolyV )+E142
60A OR90375 PADLOCK AND KEY 221 OR90253 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M5 x 12mm 1
61A OR91712 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 222 OR91023 MOTOR PULLEY 1
63A OR91579 SWITCH RESET LABEL 223 OR91770 KEY 5mm x 5mm x 36mm 1
65 OR91822 SQUARE NUT M6 (11ram Square) 224B OR91722 MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1.5 HP 1
67 STD833012 HEX HEAD SCREW M6 x 12ram 224C OR91723 START CAPACITOR 1
100 OR91065 CLAMP KNOB 224D OR91724 RUN CAPACITOR 1
101 OR91666 CLAMP BODY 225B OR91576 MOTOR SPEC PLATE 1.5 HP 1
102 OR91067 UPPER BUSHING 225C OR91678 MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM LABEL 1
103 OR91068 ELEVATING KNOB 226 STD835030 HEX HEAD SCREW M8x1.26 x 30mm 4
104 OR91796 SPRING PIN 4ram x 25ram 226A STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
106 OR91069 QUICK RELEASE SPRING 227 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
106 OR91070 QUICK RELEASE BRACKET 228 OR91001 MOTOR BRACKET 1
107 OR91797 SPRING PIN 6ram x 25ram 229 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
108 OR91071 LOWER BUSHING 230 STD840812 HEX NUT M8xl.25 4
109 OR91072 ELEVATING ROD 231 OR91825 SPRING PIN 8ram x 35ram 1
110 OR91673 CLAMP FOOT 232 OR91771 LOCK NUT 1/2-13UNC 3
42
104N. TABLE SAW MODEL NO. 152.221140
233 OR91784 PLATE WASHER 416A OR91806 HEX BUTTON HEAD CAP SCREW M8x1.25 x 25ram 4
234 OR91802 WAVE WASHER 416B STD840812 HEX NUT M8x1.25 2
235 OR91054 MOTOR MOUNT STUD 416C STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 2
236 OR91056 MOTOR SPRING 416D STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
237 OR91057 STUD 416E OR91164 REAR RAIL 2
240 OR91790 SHAFT 416F OR91809 HEX BUTTON HEAD CAP SCREW M8 x 1.25 x 35ram 2
241 OR91757 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M5 x 20ram, NYL©K 416G STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
243 OR91116 ELEVATING SHAFT ASSEMBLY 416H STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
244 OR91793 SPRING PIN 3ram x 20ram 417 OR91828 PAN HEAD SELF TAP SCREW M4 x 16ram 4
245 STD541231 ,JAM NUT 5/8-18 418 OR91194 END CAP, RIGHT HAND 1
248 OR91803 TRUNNION ASSEMBLY 419 OR91705 FRONT RAIL WITH SCALE, RIGHT HAND (25") ASSEMBLY 1
249 OR91800 WAVE WASHER E188 419A OR91813 SQUARE HEAD SCREW M8 x 35ram 4
251 OR91028 RAISE/LOWER SLEEVE 419B STD840812 HEX NUT M8xl.26 4
252 OR91029 RAISE/LOWER SPACER 419C STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
253 OR91019 POINTER 419D STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
254 OR90659 FLAT WASHER M6 420 OR91706 FRONT RAIL WITH SCALE, LEFT HAND (24") ASSEMBLY 1
255 OR91826 CHEESE HEAD SCREW M6 x 16mm 420A OR91569 SCALE, RIGHT HAND - 25-inch 1
N/A OR91864 HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 420B OR91568 SCALE, LEFT HAND - 24-inch 1
CONSISTS OF: 256, 256A, 256B & 256C N/A 421 OR91185 MICRO-ADJUST SHAFT OVERM©LD ASSEMBLY 1
256 OR91645 HANDWHEEL 422 OR91764 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M5 x 10mm 1
256A OR91641 ELEVATING KNOB ASSEMBLY 423 OR91773 MICRO-ADJUST SPRING 1
256B OR91038 KNOB BOLT 424 OR91187 MICRO-ADJUST KNOB ASSEMBLY 1
256C OR91044 KNOB END CAP 425 OR91829 FLAT HEAD SCREW M4 X 10mm 1
258 OR91046 HANDWHEEL LOCK KNOB 426 OR91196 HANDLE PIVOT SHAFT 1
N/A OR91117 TILT SHAFT ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 427 OR91736 CLAMP CAM 1
CONSISTS OF: 259, 260, 261 & 261A N/A 428 OR91191 FENCE KNOB ASSEMBLY 1
261 OR91117 TILT SHAFT ASSEMBLY 1 43O OR91812 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 22mm 2
261A OR91793 SPRING PIN 3ram x 2Omm 1 431 STD852006 LOCK WASHER M6 2
262 OR91738 ECCENTRIC 1 432 OR91830 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:6.4, OD:18, T:1.6) 2
263 OR91606 FRONT BRACKET 1 433 OR91739 E-RING #8 2
264 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M1O 2 434 OR91189 BRACKET 1
265 STD836045 HEX HEAD SCREW M1Ox1.5 x 45ram 2 435 OR91188 TENSION CLIP 1
266 OR91018 TILT COLLAR 1 436 STD852006 LOCK WASHER M6 1
266A OR91740 FIBER WASHER 3/8" 1 437 OR91755 HEX SOCKET BUTTON HEAD SCREW M6 x 12mm 1
266B OR91137 COLLAR 1 438 OR91731 SPECIAL SCREW M8 x 26mm 2
266C OR91762 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW 1/4-20 X 1/4" 2 439 OR91183 HEAD CASTING 1
267 OR91816 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M6 x 8ram 1 439A OR91571 DEBRIS WARNING LABEL 1
268 STD840508 HEX NUT M5 2 439B OR91572 LIFTING WARNING LABEL 1
268A OR91827 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:5.3, ©D:18, T:3) 2 44O OR91730 SPECIAL PLASTIC SET SCREW M8 x 16ram 2
269 OR91617 TILT BRACKET 1 441 OR91192 END CAP, LEFT HAND" 1
270 OR91786 ROUND HEAD SCREW M5 x 25ram 2 444 OR91138 ALIGNMENT BAR 2
N/A OR91804 HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 445 OR90239 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M6 X 6ram 8
CONSISTS OF: 271,271A, 271B & 271C N/A
446 OR91748 HEX HEAD SCREW M6 X 22ram 2
271 OR91045 HANDWHEEL
447 OR91831 INTERNAL TOOTH LOCK WASHER M6 2
271A OR91041 TILTING KNOB ASSY
448 STD851006 FLAT WASHER M6 2
271B OR91638 KNOB BOLT
449 OR91136 GLIDE PAD 2
271C OR91644 KNOB END CAP
450 STD840610 HEX NUT M6 2
273 OR91646 HANDWHEEL LOCK KNOB
561 OR91200 CABINET ASSY WELDMENT 1
274 OR91768 JAM NUT 9/16-18
561A OR91562 SPEC TAG 1
275 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M1O
561B OR91565 BEVEL SCALE 1
276 STD852010 LOCK WASHER M10
501C OR91560 NAMEPLATE 1
277 STD841015 HEX NUT M10xl.5
501D OR91566 BLADE ELEVATION AND TILT LABEL 1
280 OR91726 BOX END WRENCH
502 OR91103 HINGE ASSEMBLY 1
281 OR91727 OPEN END WRENCH
502A STD840508 HEX NUT M5 4
282 OR90289 2.Smm ALLEN WRENCH
502B STD851005 FLAT WASHER M5 4
283 OR90290 3ram ALLEN WRENCH
568 OR91787 ROUND HEAD TAP SCREW 1/4-20 x 3/8" 3
564 OR91123 MOTOR COVER 1
564A OR91564 WARNING LABEL 1
565 OR91777 PAN HEAD SCREW M5 X 15ram 4
287 OR91808 1/8" ALLEN WRENCH
506 OR91058 LATCH BLACK SWELL ASSEMBLY 2
290 OR91814 CABLE CLAMP
527 OR91134 WRENCH HOOK 1
291 OR91787 ROUND HEAD TAP SCREW 1/4-20 x 3/8"
528 OR91135 FENCE HOOK 2
401 OR91166 CLAMP KNOB
529 OR91832 TRIANGLE TAP SCREW M4 x 8ram 6
402 OR91165 AUXILIARY FENCE
529A OR91832 TRIANGLE TAP SCREW M4 x 8ram 2
403 OR91167 SQUARE NUT 1/4-20
530 OR91177 LEG ASSEMBLY WELDMENT 2
N/A OR91714 FENCE ASSEMBLY (NOT SHOWN)
531 OR91174 RUBBER FOOT PAD 4
CONSISTS OF: 404, 405,406,406A, 407,408,409, 410,
411,412, 413,414, 422,426,427,428,430, 431,432,
433, 434,435, 436,437,438,439,439A, 439B, 440, 533 OR91128 DUST PORT 1
446, 447,448, 449 & 450 N/A 534 STD840812 HEX NUT M8x1.25 8
404 OR91828 PAN HEAD SELF TAP SCREW M4 x 16ram 2 535 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 8
405 OR91168 FENCE TOP 1 536 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 8
405A OR91570 CRAFTSMAN LABEL, VERTICLE 1 538 OR91173 DUST CHUTE WELDMENT 1
406 OR91169 FENCE END CAP 1 539 OR91179 TIE BAR 2
406A OR91764 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M5 x 10ram 1 540 OR91181 CARRIAGE HEAD SCREW 5/16-18 x 5/8" 8
406B OR91828 PAN HEAD SELF TAP SCREW M4 x 16ram 2 541 STD551031 FLAT WASHER 5/16" 8
407 OR91199 FENCE HOLD DOWN 1 542 STD551131 LOCK WASHER 5/16" 8
408 OR91197 PIVOT PIN 1 543 STD541031 HEX NUT 5/16"-18 8
409 OR91198 PIVOT BUSHING 2 544 STD835025 HEX HEAD SCREW M8xl.25 x 25ram 8
410 OR91162 FENCE EXTRUSION 1 545 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 8
411 OR91761 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M8x1.25 x 25ram 2 546 STD835025 HEX HEAD SCREW M8xl.25 x 25ram 4
411A OR90311 FLAT WASHER M8 2 547 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
412 OR91778 PAN HEAD SCREW M5 x 16ram 4
413 OR90462 FLAT WASHER M5 4
414 OR91182 CURSOR 2
415 OR91195 REAR RAIL CONNECTOR 1
43
o
Z
W
F
m
>
39B
61A
63A
0
m
r-
z
P
o
?
Z
W
r-
m
1
I
2S2
283 0
E84
m
285 r_
286 Z
U_
0
?
Z
W
m
(2)
406B (2)
441
487
411A
410
440
444
445 (8;
459_
438(2)_
437
435_
434_ (2)
433(2)
432,
431
430 (4)
425 421
419D (4)
428 420A
0
(4) m
r-
z
9
o
o
Z
501D
501A
W
r,_
rrl
503(3)
504---
52,
529A(2)
502B
529(6)\ 527\_ /505(4-)
502A(4.)-_
__ 506(2)
501C
"-4
/
501B
0
I'll
r-
Z
P
bO
4_
0
,_ NOTES ,_
48
anuai dei Proprietario
CRRFr MRH
1.5 caballos de fuerza (servicio continuo)
2 caballos de fuerza (ma×imo desarrollado)
3450 R.P.M. (R.P.M. sin carga)
de 1 puig.
No. de Modelo
152.221140
f
Linea de Ayuda al Cliente
PRECAUCION:
PARA SU SEGURIDAD PERSONAL: 1-800-897-7709
Lea y obedezca todas las Instrucciones Sirvase toner listo su
de Seguridad y Funcionamiento antes No. de Modelo y No. de Serie.
de accionar esta Sierra de Mesa.

No. de Modelo OR91551
Revisado: REV. D
49
SECCION P._GINA
Garantfa ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Especificaciones del producto ............................................................................................................................................................. 50
GIosario de terminos ........................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Instruccienes de seguridad ................................................................................................................................................................. 52
Directrices para las extensiones electricas ........................................................................................................................................ 53
Instrucciones de conexi6n a tierra ...................................................................................................................................................... 54
Instrucciones especificas de seguridad para las sierras de mesa ..................................................................................................... 55
Accesorios y aditamentos ................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Contenido de la caja ............................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Conozca su sierra de mesa ............................................................................................................................................................... 62
Instrucciones de montaje .................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Operaciones y ajustes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 73
Mantenimiento ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 87
Gu[a de Iocalizaci6n de aveffas .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Informaci6n de servicio ....................................................................................................................................................................... 92
GARANT[A COMPLETA DE UN ANO
Si este producto Ilegara a fallar debido a defectos materiales o de elaboraci6n dentro de un are desde la fecha de compra,
devuelvalo a su Centre de Servicio Sears mas cercano para repararlo sin costo alguno.
Si se hace uso de este producto para fines comerciales o de alquiler, esta garantfa se aplica s61o per espacio de 90 d[as desde
la fecha de compra.
Esta garantfa le concede derechos legales especfficos, y tambien podr_ tener otros derechos que variaran de un estado a otro.
Sears Roebuck and Co., Dept. 817 WA, Hoffman Estates, IL 60179
Sierra de Mesa de 10 pulg. Mesa frente a la hoja a la

Tipo de motor Inducci6n profundidad mb,xima de corte 12-1/2 pulg.
HP de servicio continuo 1.5 Ancho maximo de la fresa
rotativa de ranurar 13/16 pulg.
HP mb,ximo desarrollado 2
15/7.5 Diametro maximo de hoja de
Amperios
la fresa rotativa de ranurar 8 pulg.
Voltios 120/240
Ala de mesa izquierda
Hertz 6O
y derecha 10 pulg., hierro fundido
RPM 3450 R.RM. (R.P.M. sin carga) Peso de la sierra de mesa 350 Ibs.
Inclinaci6n de la hoja Inclinaci6n izquierda
Marcha de la hoja Correa Poly-V
Diametro de la hoja 10 pulg.
Eje de la hoja 5/8 pulg. Haga use de la protecci6n de circuitos correcta para evitar los
N0mero de dientes 4O cheques electricos a si mismo y el dare a la Sierra de Mesa.
No la exponga a la Iluvia ni haga uso de ella en entornos
Velocidad de la hoja 3450 R.RM. h0medos.
Tipo de guia Gufa y rieles de enclavamiento
frontal de aluminio extruido La Sierra de Mesa viene cableada de fabrica para el fun-
Profundidad maxima de cionamiento a 120 V, 60 Hz. Conectar a un circuito ramal de
corte a 90 grados 3-3/8 pulg. 120 V, 15 amperios y utilice un fusible o disyuntor de circuitos
Profundidad maxima de de retardaci6n de tiempo de 15 amperios. El circuito electrico
corte a 45 grados 2-1/4 pulg. no podrb, tener un tamaffo de cable menor al #14. Para evitar
cheques o incendios, reponga el cordon de energfa inmedi-
Corte a Io largo maximo
atamente si est& daffado en cualquier manera.
a la derecha de la hoja 25 pulg.
Corte a Io largo maximo
a la izquierda de la hoja 24 pulg.
50
Alefriz - Muesca cuadrada en el borde del material.
Fresa rotativa de ranurar - Corte no directo que produce
una muesca cuadrada. Una fresa rotativa tiene, tfpicamente,
Contragolpe - Cuando el material es arrojado hacia el oper- un ancho de 1/8 a 13/16 pulg. Una fresa rotativa requiere un
ario durante una operaci6n de corte en el memento que el conjunte especial de hojas que no estan incluidas con esta
material hace contacto inicial con la hoja, o si el material hace sierra de mesa.
constricci6n sobre la hoja. Los contragolpes son peligrosos y
pueden resultar en heridas graves.
Goma, alquitr_in o resina - Residue pegajoso y basado en
la savia producido por los productos de madera.
Corte a Io largo - La operaci6n de hacer un corte a Io largo
del grano del material.
Gradaci6n de la hoja de la sierra - La distancia en que las
puntas de la hoja de la sierra est_n anguladas hacia afuera
Corte compuesto - La operaci6n de hacer cortes tanto de desde el grosor de la hoja. La gradaci6n de los dientes de la
biselado come de ingletes a la misma vez. hoja de la sierra permite que el cuerpo de la hoja atraviese
todos los cortes con seguridad.
Corte de biselado - La operaci6n de realizar cualquier corte

con el conjunto de hojas en cualquier grade que no sea 90 Ladeo - El mal alineamiento de la hoja con las ranuras de
grados. ingletes, o cuando la hoja no esta paralela con las ranuras de
ingletes.
Corte de ingletes - La operaci6n de hacer un corte utilizan-

do la escuadra de ingletes a cualquier angulo que no sea de Mano libre - Una operaci6n muy peligrosa para efectuar un
cero grados. corte sin hacer uso de la gufa de corte ni la escuadra de
ingletes durante una operaci6n de corte. Los cortes a mano
libre jam_s deben realizarse con una Sierra de Mesa.
Corte repetido - La operaci6n de realizar un corte para
reducir el grosor del material.
Mesa / zona de trabajo - La superficie total de la parte
superior de la sierra de mesa sobre la que descansa el
Corte transversal - La operaci6n de realizar un corte a Io material mientras que se realizan operaciones de montaje o
ancho del grano o el ancho del material. de corte.
Dedos anti-contragolpe - Dispositivo de seguridad conec- Refrentado - Dispositivo accesorio que puede hacerse o
tado al protector de hoja y al ensamblado del hendidor comprarse para ayudar a la gufa o sujetar un material durante
dise5ado para evitar la expulsi6n de un material durante las las operaciones de corte.
operaciones de corte.
Trayecto de la hoja de la sierra - La zona que esta directa-

Eje - El eje sobre el cual esta montada la hoja o la herra- mente en Ifnea con la hoja, incluyendo la zona per encima,
mienta cortante de accesorio. por debajo y per delante de la misma.
Entalladura - La pieza removida del material per la hoja Vara de empuje - Dispositivo accesorio que puede hacerse o
durante cualquier operaci6n de corte. comprarse para ayudar a empujar el material a traves de la
hoja. Se hace uso de una vara de empuje para evitar que las
manos del operario entren en contacto con la hoja durante el
corte a Io largo de materiales angostos.
51
INSTRUCCIONES GENERALES DE 9. UTILICE PROTECClON OCULAR SIEMPRE. Cualquier
SEGURIDAD herramienta mecanica puede arrojar escombros hacia los
ojos durante el funcionamiento, pudiendo esto resultar en
El funcionamiento de una Sierra de Mesa puede resultar heridas oculares graves y permanentes. Los anteojos de
peligroso si se hace caso omiso de la seguridad y del sentido uso cotidiano NO son gafas de seguridad. Utilice Gafas
com0n. El operario debe estar familiarizado con el funciona- de Protecci6n SIEMPRE (que cumplan con la normativa
miento de la herramienta. Lea este manual para entender su Z87.1 de ANSI) durante la operaci6n de herramientas
Sierra de Mesa. NO OPERE esta Sierra de Mesa si no mecanicas. Las Gafas de Protecci6n estan disponibles
entiende plenamente las limitaciones de dicha herramienta. en las tiendas Sears de ventas al detal. El equipo
NO haga modificaciones de ning0n tipo a esta Sierra de auditivo debe cumplir con la Normativa $3.19 de ANSI.
Mesa. RECUERDE: Usted es responsable de su propia
seguridad.
ANTES DE UTILIZAR LA SIERRA DE MESA
Para evitar las heridas graves y el daRo a la herramienta, lea 10. SIEMPRE DESENCHUFE LA HERRAMIENTA DEL
y obedezca todas las instrucciones de Seguridad y Operaci6n TOMACORRIENTES cuando vaya a realizar ajustes,
antes de operar la Sierra de Mesa. cambiar piezas o realizar cualquier clase de manteni-
miento.
1. LEA a conciencia el Manual del Propietario. APRENDA
a como hacer uso de esta herramienta para sus aplica- 11. MANTENGA LOS ESCUDOS DE PROTECCION EN SU
clones diseRadas. SITIO Y EN BUEN ESTADO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO.
2. CONECTE TODAS LAS HERRAMIENTAS A TIERRA. 12. EVITE EL ARRANQUE ACCIDENTAL. AsegL_rese de
Si la herramienta se suministra con un enchufe de 3 que el interruptor de potencia se encuentre en la posici6n
machos, se le debe enchufar a un tomacorrientes que de "APAGADO" antes de enchufar el cord6n de potencia
disponga de 3 contactos electricos. El tercer macho se en el tomacorrientes.
utiliza para conectar la herramienta a tierra y ofreeer
protecei6n contra los choques electricos accidentales. 13. QUITE TODAS LAS HERRAMIENTAS DE MANTENI-
NO quite el tercer macho. Vea las Instrucciones de IVllENTO de la zona inmediata antes de encender la
Conexi6n a Tierra. herramienta.
3. EVITE UN ENTORNO LABORAL PELIGROSO. NO 14. SOLO UTILICE ACCESORIOS RECOMENDADOS. El

utilice las herramientas electricas en un entorno h0medo, uso de accesorios incorrectos o poco apropiados puede
ni tampoco las exponga a Iluvia. ocasionar heridas graves al operario y ocasionar da5o a
la herramienta. Si tiene dudas, consulte el manual de
4. NO utilice herramientas electricas si hay gases o Ifquidos instrucciones que se adjunta con el accesorio especffico.
inflamables presentes.
15. JAMAS DEJE UNA HERRAMIENTA EN FUNCIONA-
5, MANTENGA SIEMPRE su zona de trabajo limpia, bien IVllENTO SIN ATENDER. Conmute el interruptor de ener-
alumbrada y organizada. NO TRABAJE en un entorno gia a la posici6n de apagado. NO abandone la herra-
con superficies de piso resbalosas a eonsecuencia de los mienta hasta que esta se haya detenido por completo.
escombros, la grasa y la cera.
16. NO SE PARE SOBRE LA HERRAMIENTA. Pueden pro-
6, MANTENGA ALEJADOS A LOS NI_IOS Y VISITANTES. ducirse heridas graves si la herramienta se vuelca o si
NO permita que haya personas en la zona inmediata de usted hace contacto con la herramienta aecidentalmente.
trabajo, particularmente cuando la herramienta electrica
se encuentre en funcionamiento. 17. NO ALMACENE nada por encima ni cerca de la maquina
en donde alguien pueda intentar pararse en la herra-
7, NO DEBE FORZAR LA HERRAMIENTA a realizar mienta para alcanzarlo.
operaciones para las que no fue diseSada. Realizar& una
labor m&s segura y de mejor calidad si se le utiliza para 18. MANTENGA SU EQUILIBRIO. NO se extienda sobre la
realizar operaciones para las que fue dise5ada. herramienta. Haga uso de zapatos con suela de caucho
resistente al aeeite. Mantenga el piso libre de escombros,
8, UTILICE VESTIMENTA APROPIADA. NO vista ropa grasa o cera.
holgada, guantes, corbatas ni artfculos de joyerfa. Estos
artfculos pueden quedar atrapados en la maquina 19. MANTENGA SUS HERRAMIENTAS CUIDADOSA-
durante las operaciones y tirar del operario, atrayendolo MENTE. Mantenga sus herramientas limpias yen buen
haeia las piezas en movimiento. El usuario debe Ilevar estado. Mantenga afiladas todas las hojas y brocas.
una cubierta proteetora sobre el cabello, si tiene
cabellera larga, para impedir el contacto con eualquier
pieza en movimiento.
52
20. REVISE SI HAY PIEZAS DAI_IADAS ANTES DE CADA DIRECTRICES PARA LAS EXTENSIONES
USO DE LA HERRAMIENTA. Revise todos los protec- ELECTRICAS
tores cuidadosamente para comprobar que funcionan
correctamente y que no estan da_ados, y que realizan
Mientras menor sea el n0mero de calibre, mayor sera el
sus funciones diseRadas correctamente. Revise el alinea-
diametro de la extensi6n electrica. Si tiene dudas sobre las
miento, la fijaci6n o la ruptura de las piezas en movimien-
dimensiones correctas de una extensi6n electrica, utilice un
to. Cualquier protector u otra piezas que se encuentre
cord6n mas corto y mas grueso. Una extensi6n de dimen-
daRada debe repararse o reemplazarse inmediatamente.
siones insuficientes producira una cafda en el voltaje de Ifnea,
resultando en una perdida de potencia y el sobrecalentamien-
21. HAGA SU TALLER A PRUEBA DE NINOS quitando las to. SOLO UTILIOE UNA EXTENSION ELE_CTRICA DE 3
Ilaves del interruptor, desenchufando las herramientas de HILOS QUE DISPONGA DE UN ENCHUFE DE CONEXION
los tomacorrientes y haciendo uso de candados. A TIERRA DE 3 MACHOS,Y UN RECEPTACULO DE 3
POLOS QUE ACEPTE EL ENCHUFE DE LA M,_,QUINA.
22. NO OPERE LA HERRAMIENTA BAJO LA INFLUENClA
DE LAS DROGAS O DEL ALCOHOL.
Si esta haciendo uso de una extensi6n electrica a la intern-
perle, este seguro de que la extensi6n se encuentre marcada
23. AFIANCE TODO EL MATERIAL. Siempre que resulte
con "W-A" ("W" en el CanadA), Io que indica que su uso a la
posible, utilice abrazaderas o plantillas para asegurar el
intemperie es aceptable.
material. Esto ofrece mayor seguridad que intentar
sujetar el material con sus propias manos.
Asegurese de que las dimensiones de su extensi6n electrica
sean las correctas y que se encuentre en buen estado electri-
24. MANTleNGASE ALERTA, ESTle CONSClENTE DE LO
co. Repare siempre una extensi6n electrica da5ada, o pro-
QUE HACE,Y UTILICE SENTIDO COMON CUANDO
VAYA A OPERAR UNA HERRAMIENTA MECb, NICA. cure que una persona experta la repare antes del uso.
NO UTILICE LA HERRAMIENTA Sl EST.&, CANSADO O
Proteja sus extensiones electricas contra los objetos filosos,
BAJO LA INFLUENClA DE DROGAS, ALCOHOL O
el calor en exceso y de los lugares mojados o h0medos.
MEDICAMENTOS, Un momento de descuido durante el
uso de herramientas electricas puede resultar en
lesiones personales graves.
FUNCIONAMIENTO A 120 VOLTIOS SOLAMENTE

25. El uso de esta herramienta puede generar y dispersar
polvo u otras partfculas aereas, incluyendo polvo de 25 PIES DE 50 PIES DE 100 PIES DE
madera, polvo de sflice cristalino y polvo de asbesto. LARGO LARGO LARGO
Dirija las partfculas en la direcci6n opuesta a la cara y el
cuerpo. Opere la herramienta siempre en un lugar con 0 a 6 Amperios 18AWG 16AWG 16 AWG
buena ventilaci6n y proporcione la eliminaci6n correcta
6 a 10 Amperios 18AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG
de polvo. Utilice un sistema de recolecci6n de polvo
siempre que sea posible. La exposici6n al polvo puede 10 a 12 Amperios 16AWG 16AWG 14 AWG
ocasionar da5o respiratorio grave y permanente u otros
da5os, incluyendo silicosis (una enfermedad pulmonar 12 a 15 Amperios 14 AWG 12 AWG No se
recomienda
grave), cancer y la muerte. Evite respirar el polvo y evite
el contacto prolongado con el polvo. El permitir la entrada
del polvo en su boca u ojos, o dejar que permanezca
sobre su piel, podra promover la absorci6n de materiales
da_inos. Utilice siempre la protecci6n respiratoria NIOSH
/ OSHA que sea apropiada para la exposici6n al polvo y
FUNCIONAMIENTO A 240 VOLTIOS SOLAMENTE
lave las zonas afectadas con jab6n y agua.
25 PIES DE 50 PIES DE 100 PIES DE
26. UTILICE UNA EXTENSI6N ELleCTRICA CORRECTA Y
LARGO LARGO LARGO
EN BUEN ESTADO. Cuando vaya a hacer uso de una
extensi6n electrica, aseg0rese de utilizar una que sea Io 0 a 6 Amperios 18AWG 18AWG 16 AWG
suficientemente fuerte como para transportar la cordente
a ser utilizada por su herramienta. Tenga la bondad de 6 a 10 Amperios 18AWG 18AWG 14 AWG
referirse a la tabla "CALIBRE MiNIMO RECOMENDADO
10 a 12 Amperios 16AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG
PARA LAS EXTENSIONES ELC:CTRICAS (AWG)" para
el dimensionamiento correcto de la extensi6n electrica. Si 12 a 15 Amperios 14 AWG 12 AWG No se
tiene dudas, utilice la siguiente extensi6n de mayor cali- recomienda
bre.
27. DIRECCl6N DE LA ALIMENTACION. Alimente el

material hacia la hoja o cortadora s61o contra el sentido
de la rotaci6n de la hoja o cortadora.
53
ESTA HERRAMIENTA DEBE ESTAR CONECTADA A REPONGA CUALQUIER CORDON DAI_IADO O GASTADO
TIERRA DURANTE EL USO PARA PROTEGER AL INMEDIATAMENTE.
OPERARIO CONTRA LOS CHOQUES ELleCTRICOS.
PARA LAS M,_QUINAS CONECTADAS A TIERRA Y CON

EN EL CASO DE UN MALFUNCIONAMIENTO O AVERiA, la CORDON DISEhlADAS PARA EL USO EN UN CIRCUITO
conexi6n a tierra ofrece el trecho de menor resistencia para la DE SUMINISTRO CON UNA POTENClA DE RIeGIMEN
corriente electrica y reduce el riesgo de los choques electri- MENOR A LOS 150 VOLTIOS.
cos. Esta herramienta viene equipada con un cord6n electrico
que dispone de un conductor de conexi6n a tierra para el
equipo asf como un enchufe de conexi6n a tierra. El enchufe Esta herramienta est& diseSada para el uso en un circuito
DEBE estar enchufado a un tomacorrientes coincidente que que disponga de un tomacorrientes como el que se ilustra en
haya sido correctamente instalado y conectado a tierra de la FIGURA "IA". La FIGURA "IA" muestra un enchufe elec-
acuerdo con TODOS los c6digos y ordenanzas municipales. trico de 3 hilos y un tomacorrientes electrico con conductor de
conexi6n a tierra. Si no se encuentra disponible un toma-
corrientes debidamente conectado a tierra, se puede haeer
NO MODIFIQUE EL ENCHUFE SUMINISTRADO. Haga que uso de un adaptador, seg0n Io ilustrado en la FIGURA "IB",
un electricista calificado instale el tomacorrientes apropiado si para conectar dicho enchufe provisionalmente al toma-
el enchufe no cabe en el tomacorrientes. corrientes de 2 contactos que no esta conectado a tierra.
El adaptador cuenta con una orejeta rfgida que DEBE ser
LA CONEXION ELI_CTRICA INCORRECTA del conductor de conectada a una conexi6n a tierra permanente, tal como Io es
conexi6n a tierra para el equipo puede resultar en el riesgo una caja de tomacorrientes debidamente conectada a tierra.
SE PROHiBE EL USO DE ESTE ADAPTADOR EN EL
de choques electricos. El conductor con el aislamiento verde
CANADA.
(con o sin rayas amarillas) es el conductor de conexi6n a
tierra para el equipo. NO conecte el conductor de conexi6n a
tierra para el equipo a una terminaci6n viva si resulta nece- PRECAUCION: En todos los casos, aseg0rese de que el
sario reparar o reemplazar el cord6n electrico o el enchufe. tomacorrientes en cuesti6n este debidamente conectado a
tierra. Si no est& seguro, haga que un electricista certificado
revise el tomacorrientes.
CONSULTE con un electricista calificado o personal de
servicio si no entiende las instrucciones de conexi6n a tierra
completamente, o si no est& seguro que la herramienta est& El motor suministrado con su Sierra de Mesa es un motor
debidamente conectada a tierra.
monof&sico de voltaje doble, 120/240 voltios. Si desea operar
su sierra de mesa a 240 voltios, sera necesario reconectar
El motor suministrado con su Sierra de Mesa es un motor los avances del motor dentro de la caja de empalmes del
monofasico de corriente alterna y voltaje doble de 120/240 motor, siguiendo el diagrama de cableado que aparece en la
voltios, 60 hertzios. Se envfa cableado para las aplicaciones cubierta de la caja de empalmes.
a 120 voltios. Jamas conecte el alambre verde (de tierra) a un
terminal vivo.
SOLO UTILICE UNA EXTENSl6N ELI=CTRICA DE 3 HILOS ASEGURESE de que el motor este desconectado de la
QUE DISPONGA DE UN ENCHUFE DE CONEXION A fuente de energfa antes de reconectar los avances del motor.
TIERRA DE 3 MACHOS,Y UN RECEPTACULO DE 3
POLOS QUE ACEPTE EL ENCHUFE DE LA M_,QUINA.
Fig. 1 A Fig. 1 B
orejeta del adaptador
120 Voltios 1 20 VoItios de conexi6n a tierra
conductor de conexi6n
a tierra conductor de conexi6n f'_'_'_)_] /
a tierra
0
tomacorrientes
para tres
machos
tomacorrientes para
cord6n el_ctrico de dos machos
tres hilos el_ctricos
de tres hilos
54
Tambien serA necesario reemplazar el enchufe de 120 voltios ASEGURESE de que las mascaras o respiradores tienen
suministrado con el motor por un enchufe clasificado por aprobaci6n MSHA / NIOSH.
UL/CSA come apropiado para los 240 voltios y la corriente
clasificada de la sierra. Comun[quese con un electricista local El funcionamiento de cualquier sierra de mesa puede tener
competente acerca de los procedimientos correctos para come consecuencia la expulsi6n de escombros hacia sus
instalar el enchufe. La sierra de mesa debe cumplir con todos ojos, Io que puede resultar en heridas oculares graves.
los c6digos electricos en el ambito local y nacional tras la UTILICE SIEMPRE Gafas de Protecci6n (que cumplan con la
instalaci6n del enchufe de 240 voltios. normativa Z87.1 de ANSI) cuando vaya a hacer uso de la
sierra de mesa. Las Gafas de Seguridad estan disponibles en
La sierra de mesa con el enchufe de 240 voltios s61o debe
las tiendas Sears de ventas al detal. Mantenga los pulgares y
conectarse a un tomacorrientes que disponga de la misma los dedos alejados de la hoja mientras que esta se encuentre
configuraci6n que el enchufe ilustrado en la Figura "1C". No girando.
hay adaptadores disponibles para el enchufe de 240 voltios ni
tampoco debe usarse ninguno.
tomacorrientes
Fig. 1C conectado a tierra
240 VOLTIOS maohos

portadires Debe observar siempre las precauciones basicas cuando
de corriente
©
utiliza su Sierra de Mesa. Para reducir el riesgo de lesiona-
miento, cheque electrico o incendio, cumple con las reglas de
seguridad que siguen:
1. LEA y entienda el manual de instrucciones antes de

e poner la sierra de mesa en funcionamiente.
el macho de conexidn a
tierra es el m4s largo de
© 2.
3.
NO OPERE ESTA MAQUINA hasta que se encuentre
ensamblada e instalada conforme alas instrucciones.
ASESORESE CON SU SUPERVISOR, instructor u otra

los 3 machos persona experta si no estA familiarizado con el uso de
esta maquina
4, NO PERMITA que la sierra de mesa permanezca

enchufada al tomacorrientes. La sierra de mesa debe
desenchufarse del tomacorrientes cuando no se encuen-
ASEGURESE de que el tomacorrientes en cuesti6n este
tre en uso y antes de rendir servicio, cambiar hojas y
debidamente conectado a tierra. Si no esta seguro, haga que
limpiar.
un electricista competente revise el tomacorrientes.
5. COLOQUE el interrupter de energ[a en "APAGADO"
antes de desenchufar la sierra de mesa.
La Sierra de Mesa es para el uso en interiores exclusiva- 6. PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE CHOQUES EL¢CTRI-
mente. No la exponga a la Iluvia, ni haga use de ella en COS, no utilice la sierra a la intemperie. No la exponga a
lugares ht_medos. la Iluvia. Almacenela puertas adentro.
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD 7, OBEDEZCA todos los c6digos electricos y de seguridad,

ESPECJFICAS PARA LAS SIERRAS DE incluyendo el C6digo Electrico Nacional (NEC) y las
Nermas de Salud y Seguridad en el Trabajo (OSHA).
MESA Todas la conexiones y cableado electrico deben ser
realizadas s61o per personal competente.
REGLAMENTO "PROPOSITION 65" DE
CALIFORNIA 8. NO manipule el enchufe ni la sierra de mesa con las
manes mojadas.
9. UTILICELA s61o come se describe en este manual.

EL POLVO GENERADO MEDIANTE LIJADO MEC,&NICO, Utilice accesorios recomendaos por Sears solamente.
ASERRADO, RECTIFICACION, PERFORACION Y OTRAS
ACTIVIDADES DE CONSTRUCCION contiene productos 10. JAMAS tire de la Sierra de Mesa per su cord6n de
qu[micos conocidos come fuentes de cancer, defectos de energ[a. NUNCA permite que el cord6n de energia entre
nacimiento u otros dares reproductivos. Algunos ejemplos de en contacto con berdes filosos, superficies calientes,
estos qu[micos incluyen los siguientes: aceite o grasa.
• plomo proveniente de pinturas con base de plomo, 11. NO desenchufe la sierra de mesa tirando del cord6n de
• s[lice cristalino de ladrillos y cemento y otros productos energ[a. AGARRE siempre el enchufe y no el cord6n.
de mamposter[a, y
12. REPONGA un cord6n daRado inmediatamente. NO
o arsenico y creme de las maderas tratadas con qu[micos. utilice un cord6n o enchufe que esten daRados. Si la
Su riesgo proveniente de dichas exposiciones podra variar sierra de mesa funciona debidamente, o si ha side da5a-
segt_n que tan a menudo realice dicha clase de trabajo. Para da, dejada a la intemperie o si ha entrado en contacto
reducir su exposici6n a estos qu[micos: trabaje en un sitio con el agua, devuelvala a un Centro de Servicio Sears.
que goce de buena ventilaci6n y trabaje con equipo de
seguridad aprobado, tal como las caretas de polvo diseBadas 13. NO utilice la sierra de mesa come juguete. NO LA
especialmente para filtrar las part[culas microsc6picas. UTIMCE si hay niBos presentes.
55
14. La Sierra de Mesa esta diseRada para el use dom4stico 27. JAMAS realice labores de trazado, ensamblado o men-
o el use comercial ligero SOLAMENTE. taje sobre la mesa / zona de trabaje cuande la maquina
se encuentre en funcionamiento.
15. CONECTE la sierra de mesa a un tomacorrientes 28. JAMAS reestablezca el bot6n de sobrecarga termica sin
debidamente conectado a tierra. Vea las instrucciones de haber apagado antes la sierra de mesa.
conexi6n a tierra.
29. APOYE los materiales largos o anchos correctamente.
16. UTIMCE SIEMPRE los protectores cuando resulte posi-
ble hacerlo. Revise que esten en su sitio, afianzados y 30. APAGUE LA SIERRA y desenchL]fela de la fuente de
funcionando correctamente. energfa. Limpie la mesa / zona de trabajo antes de aban-
donar la sierra. BLOQUEE el interrupter de ARRANQUE
17. EVITE LOS CONTRAGOLPES haciendo Io siguiente: / PARADA (START/STOP) con el candado suministrado
• Manteniendo la hoja afilada y libre de oxidaci6n y para impedir el uso desautorizado.
alquitran.
31. POSICIONE SIEMPRE la gufa auxiliar per Io menos
• Manteniendo la gufa de corte a Io largo paralela con la 2 pulgadas en frente de la hoja de la sierra cuande vaya
hoja de la sierra. a usar la gufa auxiliar como tope de parada durante el
• Usando el protector de la hoja de la sierra y el ensam- corte transversal.
blade del hendidor para todas las eperaciones posibles,
incluyendo el aserrado directo. 32. El ala de extensi6n derecha DEBE ESTAR plenamente
• Empujando el material mas all_ de la hoja de la sierra ensamblado y la cubierta del motor debe estar cerrada y
antes de soltarlo. afianzada antes de que se conecte la sierra de mesa a la
fuente de energfa.
• No cortando a Io largo jam#,s ning0n material que este
torcido o alabeado, o que no disponga de un borde 33. INFORMACION ADIClONAL sobre el funcionamiento
recto para guiarlo a Io largo de la gufa de corte.
seguro y correcto de este preducto esta disponible de
• Usando tablas de refrentado cuando no pueda utilizarse parte del National Safety Council, 1121 Spring Lake
el protector de hoja y el ensamblado del hendidor. Drive, Itasca, IL 60143-3201 en el Manual de Prevenci6n
• No aserrando jam_s una pieza de material grande que de Accidentes para Operacienes Industriales asf come en
no pueda controlarse. las Hojas de Dates de Seguridad suministradas per el
NSC. Tenga la bondad de referirse tambien a los
• No usando jamas la guia durante el corte transversal.
Requisites de Seguridad para la Maquinaria de
• No aserrando jamAs un material con nudos sueltos u Ebanisterfa ANSI 01.1 de la American National Standards
otras imperfecciones. Institute y el Reglamente OSHA 1910.213 del U.S.
Department of Labor.
18. RETIRE las piezas troceadas y los escombros de la
mesa antes de arrancar la sierra. La vibraci6n de la 34. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES. Refierase a elias
sierra puede hacer que se muevan hacia la hoja de la con frecuencia y utilfcelas para instruir a los demas.
sierra, expulsandolas. Despues de realizar el corte,
apague la sierra. Cuando la hoja se haya detenido por Las fuentes que aparecen a continuaci6n tienen informaci6n
completo, desenchufe la sierra y retire los escombros. disponible acerca de la venta y funcionamiento correcto de
esta herramienta:
19. JAMAS ARRANQUE la sierra con el material contra la
hoja. Power Tool Institute
1300 Summer Avenue
20. JAMAS realice operaciones "a mane libre'. Haga use de Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
la gufa de corte o de la gufa de ingletes para orientar y www. powertoolinstitute.org
guiar el material. Sujete el material firmemente contra la
escuadra de ingletes o la gufa de corte. National Safety Council
1121 Spring Lake Drive
21. UTILICE una varilla o varillas de empuje para cortar Itasca, IL 60143-3201
materiales angostos a Io largo.
American National Standards Institute
22. EVITE OPERACIONES Y POSICIONES MANUALES 25 West 43rd Street
TORPES en las que un deslizamiento repentino puede 4th floor
hacer que su mane haga contacte con la hoja de la New York, NY 10036
sierra.
www.ansi.org
23. MANTENGA brazes, manes y dedos alejados de la hoja. ANSI 01.1 Safety Requirements for Woodworking
Machines (Requisites de Seguridad para la Maquinaria de
24. JAMAS penga ninguna parte de su cuerpo en Ifnea con Ebanisterfa ANSI 01.1) y los reglamentos del U.S.
el trayecto de la hoja de la sierra. Department of Labor
www.esha.gov
25. JAMAS intente alcanzar alrededor ni per encima de la
hoja.
26. JAMAS intente liberar una hoja atascada sin primero

apagar y desenchufar la hoja de la fuente de energfa.
56
ACCESORIOS DISPONiBLES Sears podrarecomendarotros accesorios nolistados en este
manual.
Visite su Departamento de Ferreterfa de Sears o consulte el
Catalogo de Herramientas Electricas y de Mano de Sears Consulte su Departamento de Ferreterfa de Sears mas
para los siguientes accesorios: cercano o el Catalogo de Herramientas Electricas y de Mano
de Sears para otros accesorios.
ARTJCULO NOMERO DE EXISTENCIA
* Guia Auxiliar, No utilice ningt_n accesorio a menos que haya lefdo cabal-
Gufa de Corte a Io Largo 29878 mente el Manual del Propietario para dicho accesorio.
* Extensi6n y Tope de Parada
de la Escuadra de Ingletes 29879
* Abrazadera de Material,
$61o utilice accesorios recomendados para esta Sierra de
Escuadra de Ingletes 29880
Mesa. El uso de otros accesorios puede ocasionar lesiones
* Conducto de Polvo con Puerto de Polvo 22102
graves y producir da5o a la Sierra de Mesa.
* Ensamblado de Micro-Ajuste 29881
* Inserci6n de Mesa - Estandar 29882
* Inserci6n de Mesa - Fresa Rotativa 29885
* Inserci6n de Mesa - Cabezal de
Corte para Moldura 29887
* Hoja de Sierra - Leitz; 10 pulg. x 29888
40 dientes, Hoja de Paso Variable
* Sistema de Gu/as 32371
CONSTRUYENDO UNA TABLA DE BISELADO

Fig. 2A
La entalladura debe guardar una

distancia aproximada de 1/4 de pulg.
La Figura 2A ilustra las dimensiones para hacer una tabla de Fig. 2B

biselado tfpica. El material del cual esta hecho la tabla de
biselado debe ser una pieza de madera recta que este libre
de nudos y grietas. Las tablas de biselado se utilizan para
mantener el trabajo en contacto con la gu(a y la mesa para
impedir los contragolpes. Afiance la tabla de biselado a la
gufa y la mesa de manera que el borde delantero de la tabla
de biselado apoye el material hasta que se haya realizado el
corte.
Utilice tablas de biselado para todas las operaciones de corte

que no sean de paso yen las que debe retirarse el protector
y el ensamblado del hendidor. Reponga siempre el protector y
el ensamblado del hendidor una vez completadas las opera-
ciones de corte que no sean de paso. Ver figura 2B.
57
CONSTRUYENDO UNA VARA DE EMPUJE
Durante el corte a Io largo de materiales con menos de 4 pulgadas de ancho, se debe hacer uso de una vara de empuje para com-
pletar la alimentaci6n. Puede construirse f_cilmente utilizando material descartado y siguiendo el patr6n ilustrado en la Figura 2C.
Fig. 2C
La vara de empuje debe estar hecha con madera de 3/4 6 1/2 pulgada o con un grosor inferior
al ancho del material a cortarse.
La figura 2C debe copiarse y hacerse a escala, de tal manera que las rejillas sean de 1/2
pulgada cuadrada. Esta copia puede emplearse en la construcci6n de su vara de empuje.
58
DESEMPACANDO Y REV[SANDO Fig. 3=1
EL CONTEN[DO 1
La sierra de mesa es una maquina pesada. Se requieren dos

personas para desempaquetarla y levantar la sierra de mesa.
Esta sierra de mesa requerira cierta cantidad de ensamblado.
Esta sierra de mesa y su gufa se envfan en una sola caja.
Esta caja tambien incluye una caja de piezas para la sierra.
1. Remueva las piezas de todas las cajas y col6quelas
sobre una superficie de trabajo limpia.
2. Se requieren dos o mas personas para levantar la sierra
de mesa de la paleta de embarque.
3. Remueva cualquier material y revestimiento protectivo de
todas las piezas y de la sierra de mesa. El revestimiento
\
de las piezas puede quitarse con rociar WD-40 sobre \
elias y limpiandolas con un patio suave. Podra ser nece-
sario repetir este proceso varias veces antes de poder \\
quitar todo el revestimiento protectivo. \

f
PRECAUCION: No utilice acetona, gasolina ni diluyente de
laca para quitar ning0n revestimiento protectivo de su sierra
de mesa.
4. Tras la limpieza, aplique una cera en pasta de buena

12
calidad sobre cualquier superficie sin pintar. Aseg0rese
de pulir la cera antes del montaje.
\
\
5, Compare los artfculos con las figuras que aparecen \
\
\
abajo. Verifique que todos los artfculos esten presentes \
\
\
antes de desechar la caja de envfo. Si faltan piezas, \
\
\
Ilame a la Linea de Ayuda al Cliente al 1-800-897-7709. \
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
El ala de extensi6n derecha debe estar plenamente ensam-

blade y la cubierta del motor debe estar cerrada y afianzada
antes de que se conecte la sierra de mesa a la fuente de
energfa.
10
Si Ilegara a faltar cualquier pieza, no intente enchufar el
cord6n de potencia y encender la sierra de mesa. La sierra
de mesa s61o podra encenderse despues de que se hayan
obtenido todas las piezas y estas hayan sido instaladas
correctamente.
SIERRA DE MESA
1. Ensamblado de sierra de mesa
2. Ala de extensi6n, hierro fundido (2)
3. Volante de mane (2)
4. Perilla de cierre del volante de mano (2) 14
5. Vara de montaje del hendidor
6. Ensamblado del soporte del hendidor
15
7. Gancho para Ilaves
9. Gancho de la guia (2)
10. Correa Poly-V
11. Ensamblado del protector de hojas
y del hendidor
12. Puerto de polvo
13. Ensamblado de pata (2)
14. Tirante de tracci6n (2)
15. Conducto de polvo
16. Interruptor
17. Hoja de la sierra (no ilustrada)
59
Fig. 3=2
GUiA
20. Gufa auxiliar 21 23 24

2O 22
21. Ensamblado de la gufa
de corte a Io largo
22. Riel delantero de la gufa,

derecho
23. Riel delantero de la gufa,

izquierdo
24. Riel trasero de la gufa (2)

25. Perilla de abrazadera con
tuerca especial (2)
26. Ensamblado de microajuste
27. Conector al riel posterior de la

gu/a
27
28. Tapa de extremo del riel
delantero, derecho
29. Tapa de extremo del riel

delantero, izquierdo
30. Barra de alineaci6n del riel
delantero de la gu/a (2) 25 _ 26 28 29 3O
Fig. 3=3
41
ESCUADRA DE INGLETES
40. Escuadra de ingletes

41. Guia de corte transversal
42. Tope de profundidad

43. Ensamblado de abrazadera
44. Tornillo de eabeza hueca

hexagonal M5 x 20 mm (3)
45. Arandela plana M5 (3)
46. Tuerca cuadrada M5 (3)

47. Vara elevadora
48. Perilla (2)
40 48 47
60
Fig. 3=4
@E! @B
TORNILLODE CABEZAHEXM8 x 1.25x 25 mm TORNILLODE CABEZAHEXM6 x 12 mm TUERCAHEX TUERCAHEX
M8 x 1.25 5/16pulg.-18
© @ @ U El 8
TORNILLODE CABEZAHEXM8 x 1.25x 30 mm TORNILLODECABEZAHUECAHEX TUERCA TUERCA
M5 x 20 mm CUADRADAM6 CUADRADAM5
TORNILLODE CABEZACUADRADAM8 x 1.25 x 35 mm @!

© ARANDELA PLANA ESPECIAL
(DI: 5.3 mm, DE: 12 mm, GROSOR: 12 mm
TORNILLODE CABEZAHUECAHEXM8 x 1.25 x 25 mm
© ©R
ARANDELAPLANA
©n
ARANDELAPLANA
TORNILLODE CABEZAHUECAHE× M8 x 1.25 x 35 mm TORNILLOAUTOROSCADOR
DE CABEZA
M8 5/16pulg.
REDONDAM4 x 8 mm
TORNILLOAUTOROSCADOR
DE CABEZA ARANDELA ARANDELA
PERNO DE CARROCERiA5/16-16 x 5/8 pulg.
REDONDAM4 x 16 mm DECIERRE DE CIERRE
M8 5/16 pulg.
Los estuches de ferreter[a no estan identificados ni etiquetados. Consulte el

diagrama de ferreteria para ayudar a Iocalizar la pieza correcta. Ver figura 3-4.
Estuche de Ferreteria para Alas de Extensi6n Estuche de Ferreteda para Patas de Gabinete y
(OR92013) incluye: Conducto de Polvo (#OR92019) incluye:
Arandela Plana M8 (8) Arandela Plana M8 (16)
Arandela de Cierre M8 (8) Arandela Plana 5/16 pulg. (8)
Tornillo de Cabeza Hexagonal M8 x 1.25 x 30 mm (8) Arandela de Cierre M8 (12)
Arandela de Cierre 5/16 pulg. (8)
Estuehe de Ferreteda para Riel Posterior (OR92016) Tornillo de Cabeza Hexagonal M8 x 1.25 x 25 mm (12)
incluye: Perno de Carroceria 5/16-18 x 5/8 pulg. (8)
Arandela Plana M8 (8) Tuerca Hexagonal M8 (8)
Arandela de Cierre (6) Tuerca Hexagonal 5/16 pulg. (8)
Tornillo de Cabeza de Bot6n M8 x 1.25 x 25 mm (4)
Tornillo de Cabeza de Bot6n M8 x 1.25 x 35 mm (2) Ferreteria para Interrupt or ON/OFF (encendido/apagado)
Tuerca Hexagonal M8 (2) (Ferreterfa acabado en Oxido Negro)
Tornillo de Cabeza Hexagonal M6 x 12 mm (2)
Estuehe de Ferreteda para Riel Delantero (OR92017) Tuerca Cuadrada M6 (2)
ineluye:
Arandela Plana M8 (4) FerreteHa Varia:
Arandela de Cierre M8 (4) Tornillo de Chapa Metalica M4 x 8 mm (6)
Tornillo de Cabeza Cuadrada M8 x 1.25 x 35 mm (4) Tornillo de Chapa MetbJica M4 x 16 mm (4)
Tuerca Hex M8 (4) Tornillo Roscador de Cabeza Redonda 1/4-20 x
3/8 pulg. (4)
61
27 2
26 5 4
3
7 11
10
12
25
23
15
22
16
21 17
20 18
1. Ensamblado del hendidor 10. Riel trasero 20. Volante de mano de elevaci6n
de hoja
2. Protector de hoja 11. Gufa auxiliar
21. Perilla de cierre del volante de
3. Dedos anticontragolpe 12. Riel delantero con escala mano
4. Hoja 13. Perilla de microajuste 22. Gancho de la guia
5. Pieza de inserci6n para alinear 14. Agarradera de cierre de la gufa 23. Volante de mano de biselado
cortes de corte a Io largo
24. Perilla de cierre del volante de
6. Superficie de la mesa 15. Cubierta del motor mano de biselado
7. Ala de hierro fundido de 10 pulg. 16. Escuadra de biselado
25. Interruptor de encendido/apagado
8. Reten de la gufa trasera 17. Gabinete de 3/4
26. Escuadra de ingletes de lujo
(no ilustrada)
18. Pata del gabinete 27. Ranura de la escuadra de
9. Gufa de corte a Io largo
19. Pie de caucho ingletes
62
HERRAMIENTAS REQUERIDAS 3, Conecte dos tirantes de tracci6n (F) por dentro y entre
las patas delanteras y traseras ya conectadas al gabinete
Se requieren las siguientes herramientas para el montaje y el
con (G) echo pernos de carrocerfa 5/16-18 x 5/8 pulg.,
alineamiento. Aviso: Se suministran dos Ilaves de hoja y cinco
arandelas planas de 5/16 pulg., arandelas de cierre de
Ilaves hexagonales con su sierra de mesa. Las herramientas
5/16 pulg. y tuercas hexagonales 5/16-18 y afiance toda
restantes son herramientas tfpicas de taller y no se incluyen
la ferreter/a de manera segura. Ver la figura 4-1.
con su sierra de mesa.
Llave de 18 mm Llave de 8 mm MONTAJE DEL CONDUCTO DE POLVO

Llave de 13 mm Llave hexagonal de 3/16 pulg.
Llave de 10 mm Destornillador Phillips #2 Figura 5=1
D
• La sierra de mesa es una maquina pesada. Podran A

requerirse dos personas para ciertas operaciones de
montaje.
• NO monte la sierra de mesa hasta que este seguro que
la herramienta este desenchufada.
• NO monte la sierra de mesa hasta que este seguro que
el interrupter de energfa est_ en la posici6n de "apagado"
(OFF).
• Para su seguridad personal, NO conecte la maquina a la
fuente de energia hasta que la m_quina se encuentre
completamente montada y haya lefdo y entendido este
Manual del Operario cabalmente.
MONTAJE DE LAS PATAS DEL GABINETE
ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada C

de la fuente de energfa.
1, Conecte el ensamblado del conducto de polvo (A) al
Coloque la mesa boca abajo para que descanse sobre la
mesa de hierro fundido. PRECAUClON: La sierra de fondo del gabinete de la sierra de mesa, asegurando que
la abertura (B) en el conducto de polvo apunte hacia la
mesa es pesada; se requieren dos personas para esta
parte posterior de la sierra de mesa (C). Utilice (D) cuatro
operaci6n. Este seguro de colocar cart6n sobre el suelo
tornillos de cabeza hexagonal M8 x 25 mm y arandelas
para proteger la superficie de la mesa.
de cierre M8 y apriete toda la ferreteria. Ver la figura 5-1.
Figura 44 2, Coloque la mesa boca arriba. PRECAUCION: La sierra

de mesa es pesada; se requieren dos personas para
A,, esta operaci6n.
o " li Figura 5=2
C
g
2, Oonecte los ensamblados de pata (A) al frente (B) y ----E

parte posterior (C) del gabinete de la sierra de mesa
colocando (D) ocho tornillos de cabeza hexagonal M8 x
25 mm y echo arandelas planas M8 hacia abajo a traves
de los agujeros de montaje en el ensamblado de patas y
el gabinete (E). Coloque una arandela plana M8, aran-
dela de cierre M8 y tuerca hexagonal M8 sobre cada uno 3. Conecte el puerto de polvo (E) al conducto de polvo (F)
con cuatro tornillos autoroscantes de cabeza redonda
de los echo tornillos que conectan el ensamblado de
patas al gabinete. No apriete la ferreterfa del todo en 1/4-20 x 3/8 pulg. Ver la figura 5-2.
este memento. Ver la figura 4-1.
63
MONTAJE DE LA CORREA POLY-V 1. PRECAUCION: Las alas de extensi6n son pesadas. Se
requieren dos personas para ensamblar ambas alas de
extensi6n a la sierra de mesa.
2, Monte una de las alas de extensi6n (A) al lado izquierdo
ASEGORESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada de la sierra de mesa. Los cuatro agujeros (B) en el ala
de la fuente de energfa. de extensi6n deben ser alineados con los cuatro agu-
jeros en el lado izquierdo de la sierra de mesa. Utilice
Figura 64 B cuatro tornillos de cabeza hexagonal M8 x 30 mm, aran-
delas de cierre M8 y arandelas planas M8. No apriete el
herramental completamente en este momento. Ver la
figura 7-1.
Figura 7-2
D
E
1. AsegLirese de que todo el material de embalaje haya sido

removido del interior del gabinete.
2. Abra la cubierta del motor y coloque la correa Poly-V (A)

del motor sobre la polea de la hoja (B). Ver la figura 6.1
3, Levante el motor (C) cuidadesamente y coloque la correa
debajo de la polea del motor (no ilustrada). Aseg0rese de 3, Coloque una regla (C) a Io ancho de la mesa de la sierra
que las muescas en "V" en la correa coincidan con las
(D) y el ala de extensi6n (E). Asegt_rese de que la cara
muescas en "V" de la polea de la hoja y el motor. Ver
frontal del ala de extensi6n (F) este plana con el frente
figura 6-1.
de la mesa de la sierra (G). Ajuste el ala de extensi6n de
4. Baje el motor cuidadosamente y cierre la cubierta del tal manera que se encuentre perfectamente plana con la
motor. mesa de la sierra. Apriete la ferreterfa de manera segura.
Ver la figura 7-2.
MONTAJE DE LAS ALAS DE EXTENSK_N
4, Repita los pasos 2 y 3 arriba para montar la otra exten-
si6n al lado derecho de la sierra.
ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada

de la fuente de energfa. MONTAJE DEL VOLANTE DE MANO
El ala de extensi6n derecho debe estar plenamente ensam- ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada
blado y la cubierta del motor debe estar cerrada y afianzada
antes de que se conecte la sierra de mesa a la fuente de
energfa.
Figura 8-1
Figura 74
A
D
C
64
Coloque uno de los volantes de mano (A) sobre el eje de 1, Monte ambos ganchos de guia (A) al lado izquierdo del
biselado (B) Iocalizado en el lado del gabinete. La ranura gabinete (B) usando cuatro tornillos de chapa metalica
(C) en el dorso del volante debe alinearse con el pasador M4 x 8 mm, no ilustrados. Ver la figura 9-1.
(D). Ver la figura 8-1.
2, Monte el gancho de Ilave (C) sobre los ganchos de gu[a
usando dos tornillos de chapa met&lica M4 x 8 mm, no
Figura 8=2
ilustrados. Ver la figura 10-1.
MONTAJE DEL PROTECTOR DE

E / HOJAS Y HENDIDOR
\
de la fuente de energia.
1. Afloje el perno de reten de la pieza de inserci6n de mesa

y quite la pieza de inserci6n de mesa.
Figura 10=1
B
2, Enrosque la perilla de cierre (E) sobre el extremo rosca-
do del eje (F). Ver la figura 8-2.
3. Repita los pasos anteriores para montar el volante

restante y la perilla de cierre sobre el eje de elevaci6n y
bajada de la hoja, Iocalizado al frente del gabinete.
MONTAJE DE LA LLAVE Y
GANCHO DE GUIA
2, Coloque el extremo roscado de la vara de montaje del

ASEGORESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada hendidor (A) a traves del agujero (B) en la parte posterior
de la fuente de energ[a. del gabinete. Coloque una tuerca hexagonal M12 (no
ilustrada) sobre el extremo roscado de la vara de monta-
je del hendidor dentro del gabinete y afi_ncelo de manera
Figura 94 segura. Ver las figuras 10-1 y 10-2.
Aviso: Coloque una Ilave de 18 mm sobre la parte hexagonal

y una Ilave de 13 mm sobre las partes planas de la vara del
hendidor y aprietelas.
Figura 10=2 C
3. Coloque el ensamblado del soporte del hendidor (C)

sobre la vara de montaje el hendidor. Ver las figuras
10-2 y 10-3.
65
Figura 10=3 Figura 10=5
H
\ 0
4, Coloque el punto de conexi6n delantero (D) del protector

de hoja y del ensamblado del hendidor (H) sobre el punto 7, Coloque una escuadra (N) sobre la mesa de la sterra y
de conexi6n delantero que carece de herramientas (E). contra el ensamblado del hendidor (O) detras de los
Coloque la ranura de conexi6n trasera (F) sobre las dedos anticontragolpe (P). Realice ajustes al ensamblado
roscas de la perilla del soporte del hendidor (G). Afiance del soporte del hendidor (Q) de tal manera que el hendi-
la perilla del soporte del hendidor de manera segura. dor quede cuadrado con la mesa de la sierra. Una vez
Aviso: Ser_ necesario posicionar el ensamblado del cuadrado, afiance los dos tornillos de cabeza hueca
soporte del hendidor de manera que se ajuste al protec- hexagonal por debajo del ensamblado de soporte del
tor de hoja y al ensamblado del hendidor por encima de hendidor. Ver la figura 10-5.
la vara de montaje del hendidor. Ver la figura 10-3.
5, Quite la tuerca hexagonal (K) y la pesta_a exterior (J) del

arbol de la hoja (I). Aviso: El arbol esta roscado a la Figura 10-6
derecha; para aflojar la tuerca hexagonal, gfrela en senti-
do antihorario. Ver la figura 10-4.
T
U
Figura 10=4
M
8, Coloque una regla (R) contra el lado izquierdo de la hoja

de la sierra (S), alineando el hendidor (T) de tal manera
que quede en Ifnea recta con la hoja, y apretando el
L_nicotornillo de cabeza hueca hexagonal (U) en la parte
superior del ensamblado de soporte del hendidor. Ver la
figura 10-6.
6, Coloque la hoja de sierra de 10 pulg. (H) sobre el eje de
la hoja (I); asegurese de que los dientes de la hoja apun- 9, Monte la pieza de inserci6n de la mesa y apriete el perno
ten hacia abajo al frente de la mesa de la sierra. Coloque de reten de la pieza que fue quitada en el paso 1.
la pestaRa exterior (J) y la tuerca hexagonal (K) sobre el
eje de la hoja y apriete la tuerca hexagonal manual- 10. Si existe cualquier problema con la falta de cuadrado del
mente. Coloque la Ilave de boca de la hoja (L) sobre las soporte de conexi6n del hendidor delantero y la mesa de
partes planas de la pesta5a interior de la hoja (no ilustra- la sierra o el alineamiento de la hoja, consulte "ALINEA-
da) y la Ilave de extremo de caja (M) de la hoja sobre la MIENTO DEL SOPORTE DEL HENDIDOR" en la secci6n
tuerca hexagonal, apretandolas seguramente. Aviso: El de Operaciones y Ajustes de este manual.
eje de la hoja tiene un roscado derecho; para afianzar la
tuerca hexagonal, gfrela en sentido horario. Ver la figura
10-4.
66
MONTAJE DE LA GU[A DE CORTE 5, Deslice las cabezas de los cuatro tornillos de cabeza
A LO LARGO hexagonal M8 x 35 mm (F), dos de cada extreme del riel
delantero, al interior del riel delantero. Aviso: El riel
delantero a0n sigue posicionado boca abajo sobre la
sierra de mesa. Posicione los tornillos de manera que
ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada puedan alinearse con los dos agujeros en la parte
de la fuente de energfa. delantera de la sierra de mesa y con un agujero en cada
ala de extensi6n (G). Ver la figura 11-2.
Figura 11-1
6, Coloque el riel delantero contra el frente de la sierra de
C A mesa con los cuatro tornillos atravesando los cuatro agu-
jeros en la mesa de la sierra y las alas de extensi6n.
Coloque una arandela plana M8, arandela de cierre M8 y
tuerca hexagonal M8 sobre cada uno de los cuatro tornil-
los en la parte trasera de la mesa de la sierra y las alas
de extensi6n. No apriete las cuatro tuercas hexagonales
del todo en este memento.
Figura 11-3
Las barras de alineamiento (B) cuentan con tornillos de

fijaci6n (A) ya instalados. Asegurese de que los tornillos
de fijaci6n esten parejos con la cara de la barra de alin-
eamiento. Ver la figura 11-1.
2, Coloque ambos rieles delanteros de la guia (C) boca
abajo sobre la sierra de mesa. Aseg0rese de que el riel
derecho de la gufa este en el lade derecho y que el riel
delantero izquierdo este en el lado izquierdo. Revise que
ambas escalas en los rieles delanteros tengan la marca
de 1 pulgada cerca de la otra. Ver la figura 11-1.
3, Inserte ambas barras de alineaci6n a mitad de camino
dentro de las ranuras trasera (D) e inferior (E) para tuer-
cas cuadradas en el riel delantero derecho. Apriete los
tornillos de fijaci6n ligeramente para sostener la barra de
alineaci6n en el riel delantero. Ver la figura 11-1.
4, Deslice el riel delantero izquierdo sobre las barras de
alineaci6n y contra la otra mitad del riel derecho.
Asegurese de que ambas secciones de los rieles
delanteros esten planas y rectas entre sf. Apriete los
tornillos de fijaci6n ligeramente en ambas barras de alin-
eaci6n. Vuelva a revisar que el riel delantero se encuen-
tre piano y recto, y luego afiance todos los tornillos de
fijaci6n de manera segura. 7, Eleve la hoja de la sierra (H) y coloque una regla (I) con-
tra el lade derecho de la hoja de la sierra, extendiendose
Figura 11-2 mas alia del frente de la mesa de la sierra. El borde del
F riel delantero derecho (J) debe estar alineado con el lado
F derecho de la hoja de la sierra, segun la regla. Ver la
figura 11-3.
C)
67
Figura 11-4 Figura 11-6
R
R
12. Utilizando una escuadra de combinaciones, asegurese

de que el riel trasero este nivelado con la mesa de la
8, Usando una escuadra de combinaciones (K), asegurese sierra, y que las alas de extensi6n est_n per debajo del
de que el riel delantero (L) este nivelado sobre la sierra fondo de las ranuras de la escuadra de ingletes. Apriete
de mesa y las alas de extensi6n. Luego, apriete las toda la ferreteffa de manera segura posteriormente. Ver
cuatro tuercas hexagonales de manera segura. Ver la la figura 11-4.
figura 11-4.
Figura 11-7
Figura 11-5
s Y
N
o Q
g, Monte el riel trasero del lado izquierdo (M) al lado

izquierdo trasero de la sierra de mesa (N). Conecte el riel
trasero (M) a la mesa (N) con dos tornillos de cabeza 13. Monte los dos cursores (U) al ensamblado de la gufa de
bot6n hexagonal M8 x 25 mm, arandelas de cierre M8 y corte a Io largo (V) utilizando cuatro tornillos de cabeza
arandelas planas M8 (O). Conecte el riel trasero al ala de troncoc6nica M5 x 16 mm y arandelas de cierre M5 (W).
extensi6n con un tornillo de cabeza bot6n hexagonal M8 Ver la figura 11-7.
x 35 mm, arandela plana M8, arandela de cierre M8 y
14. Levante la agarradera de la gufa de corte a Io largo (X) y
tuerca hexagonal M8 (P). Asegurese de que el riel
trasero se encuentre per debajo del fondo de las ranuras coloque la gufa sobre la mesa de la sierra con el cuerpo
(R) de la escuadra de ingletes. Ver las figuras 11-5 de la gufa en el riel delantero. Con la agarradera de
y 11-6. cierre de la gufa de corte a Io largo en posici6n elevada,
podr& deslizar la gufa de un lade a otro a traves de la
10. Deslice el conector del riel trasero (S) dentro del riel mesa de la sierra. El empujar la agarradera de cierre de
trasero izquierdo, ya ensamblado. Ver la figura 11-5. la gufa de corte a Io largo hacia abajo enclavara la gufa e
impedira su movimiento. Ver la figura 11-7.
11. Deslice el riel trasero del lado derecho (T) sobre el 15. Alinee el lade izquierdo de la gufa (AB) a cierta distancia
conector del riel trasero. Monte el riel trasero derecho a del lade derecho (AC) de la ranura de la escuadra de
la mesa de la sierra con dos tornillos de cabeza bot6n ingletes derecha y enclave la gufa. Ver la figura 11-7.
hexagonal M8 x 25 mm y al ala de extensi6n con un
tornillo de cabeza bot6n hexagonal M8 x 35 mm, aran- 16. Utilice una cinta de medir para medir la distancia desde
dela plana M8, arandela de cierre M8 y tuerca hexagonal el lade derecho de la hoja de la sierra hasta el lade
M8. Ver la figura 11-6. izquierdo de la gufa.
68
17. Monte el cursor (U) al lado derecho de la cruceta de la ENSAMBLADO DE LA GU[A AUX[L[AR
gufa con dos tornillos de cabeza troncoc6nica M5 x 16
mm y arandelas de cierre M5 (W). No apriete los tornillos
del todo. Ver la figura 11-7.
POSICiONE siempre la gu[a auxiliar al menos 2 pulgadas al
18. Alinee el cursor con la escala (Z) para que la raya negra frente de la hoja de la sierra cuando vaya a utilizar la gu[a
delgada (Y) se encuentre en el mismo numero que la dis- auxiliar como tope de parada durante los cortes transver-
tancia medida en el paso 16. Apriete los tornillos del cur- sales.
sor.
19. Remueva la guia de la mesa y reposici6nela en el lado Figura 13-1 D

izquierdo de la hoja de la sierra. Alinee el lado derecho
de la guia a cierta distancia del lado izquierdo de la ranu- c / B
ra de la escuadra de ingletes izquierda y enclave la gufa.
20. Utilice una cinta de medir para medir la distancia entre el

lado izquierdo de la hoja de la sierra hasta el lado dere-
cho de la guia. A
21. Monte el segundo cursor al lado izquierdo de la cruceta

de la guia con dos tornillos de cabeza troncoc6nica M5 x
16 mm y arandelas de cierre M6. No apriete los tornillos
del todo.
22. Alinee el cursor con la escala de manera que la raya

negra delgada se encuentre en el mismo numero que la
distancia medida en el paso 20. Apriete los tornillos del
cursor.
Figura 11-8
AA
1, Para conectar la gufa auxiliar (A) al ensamblado de la
gufa principal (B), enrosque dos perillas de abrazadera
(C) a traves de la parte superior de la gufa auxiliary den-
tro de una tuerca cuadrada especial 1/4-20, no ilustrada.
Ver la figura 13-1.
2, Deslice las tuercas cuadradas especiales dentro de la

parte superior de la gufa (D). Deslice la gufa auxiliar en
su sitio y apriete las perillas de abrazadera.
3, Para el uso correcto, vea "USANDO LA GU[AAUXILIAR

EN LA GUIA DE CORTE A LO LARGO" en la secci6n
23. Aviso: La gufa de corte a Io largo viene con un reten "OPERACIONES Y AJUSTES".
trasero (AA) integrado al extremo de la gufa para evitar
que la parte trasera de la gufa se eleve mientras que se
hace uso de una tabla de refrentado. Para engranar la
sujeci6n trasera, sencillamente baje el brazo de sujeci6n
de manera que quede por debajo del riel trasero, seg0n
Io ilustrado aquL Ver la figura 11-8.
24. Revise y aseg0rese de que la gufa de corte a Io largo

este cuadrada con la mesa de la sierra y paralela con la
ranura de ingletes. Si resulta necesario efectuar cualquier
ajuste, consulte la secci6n "AJUSTES DE LA GU[A" en la
secci6n de Operaci6n y Ajustes de este manual.
69
INTERRUPTOR DE ENCENDIDO/APAGADO 5, Coloque el tap6n de extremo del riel delantero izquierdo
Y ENSAMBLADO DEL TAP(_N DE (A) dentro del extremo del riel delantero (B). Conecte el
tap6n de extremo al riel con dos tornillos autoroscadores
EXTREMOS de cabeza troncoc6nica M4 x 16 mm (C). Ver la figura
14-2.
6. Repita el paso anterior para conectar el tap6n de

ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada extremo del riel delantero derecho.
de la fuente de energ[a.
CONECTANDO EL CORDON DEL
Figura 14-1 INTERRUPTOR AL CORDON DEL MOTOR
c ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada

Figura 15=1
-F
Coloque dos tornillos de cabeza hexagonal M6 x 12 mm

(A) hacia arriba a traves de los dos agujeros (B) en el
soporte del interruptor (C). Ver la figura 14-1.
B
I
2, Enrosque dos tuercas cuadradas M6 (D) sobre los A
tornillos de cabeza hexagonal M6 x 12 mm unas tres
vueltas. Ver la figura 14-1. 1, Pase el cord6n del interrupter (A) a traves del agujero (B)
3, Deslice las tuercas cuadradas M6 y el ensamblado del al frente del gabinete. Ver la figura 15-1.
interruptor (E) dentro del extremo izquierdo del riel 2. Abra la cubierta del motor, enchufe el cord6n del interrup-
delantero (F). Ver la figura 14-1. ter (C) al cord6n del motor (D). Ver la figura 15-2.
4, Posicione el ensamblado del interruptor en el lugar
deseado y apriete la ferreter[a. PRECAUClON: Aleje el Figura 15-2
interruptor del trayecto de la hoja de la sierra. El lugar
mas comt]n para el interruptor es a la izquierda de la
hoja de la sierra.
Figura 14-2
3, Retire la holgura en el cord6n interruptor hacia el interior

del gabinete.
4. Haga un lazo (E) desde la holgura del cord6n interruptor
y col6quelo detras de la barra de reten del cord6n (F).
Ver figura 15-2.
70
MONTAJE DE LA ESCUADRA DE Figura 16-2
[NGLETES
ASEGORESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada

Figura 16-1
E
4, Deslice ambas tuercas cuadradas con el tornillo de
cabeza hueca hexagonal y arandela plana (F) hacia la
ranura en "T" inferior (G) de la gufa de corte transversal
(H). Ver la figura 16-2.
5, Coloque la secci6n roscada de los tornillos de cabeza
hueca hexagonal en las ranuras (I) del cuerpo de la
escuadra de ingletes. Asegurese de que las arandelas
B planas esten contra las cabezas de los tornillos de
cabeza hueca hexagonal. Ver la figura 16-2.
6, Posicione la gufa de corte transversal de tal manera que
Enrosque la vara de elevaci6n (A) en el agujero roscado ninguna parte de la gufa se encuentre en el trayecto de
superior del cuerpo de la escuadra de ingletes (B). la hoja de la sierra. Permita que la guia de corte trans-
Consulte la figura 16-1. versal descanse sobre la hoja de la sierra y apriete se-
guramente los dos tornillos de cabeza hueca hexagonal.
2, Coloque el ensamblado de abrazadera (C) sobre la peril-
la de la escuadra de ingletes (D) y la vara de elevaci6n.
Figura 16-3 j L
Coloque dos perillas (E) a traves de la ranura en el
ensamblado de la abrazadera y enrosque una perilla en
la perilla de la escuadra de ingletes y otra en la vara de
elevaci6n. Posicione el ensamblado de abrazadera
segun Io indicado y apriete ambas perillas. Ver la figura
16-1.
3, Coloque una arandela plana M5 sobre un tornillo de

cabeza hueca hexagonal M5 x 20 mm. Enrosque una
tuerca cuadrada M5 sobre el tornillo de cabeza hueca
hexagonal hasta que el tornillo quede parejo con la parte
trasera de la tuerca cuadrada. Repita este paso para una
arandela plana, tornillo de cabeza hueca hexagonal y
tuerca cuadrada adicionales.
7, Coloque una arandela plana M5 sobre un tornillo de

cabeza hueca hexagonal M5 x 20 mm (J). Coloque esto
a traves del agujero en la parte superior del tope de pro-
fundidad (K). Enrosque una tuerca cuadrada M5 sobre el
tornillo de cabeza hueca hexagonal hasta que el tornillo
quede parejo con la parte trasera de la tuerca cuadrada.
Ver la figura 16-3.
8, Deslice la tuerca cuadrada y el tope de profundidad hacia
la ranura en "T" superior (L) de la gufa de corte transver-
sal. Ver la figura 16-3.
9, Posicione el tope de profundidad seg0n Io deseado y
apriete el tornillo de cabeza hueca hexagonal.
71
EMPERNANDO LA SIERRA DE MESA
AL PiSO

Si Io desea, la sierra de mesa puede montarse al piso de

forma permanente. Para conectarla al piso, consulte las sigu-
ientes instrucciones:
Fig. 15A-1
1. Retire las cuatro almohadillas de goma (A) de las patas

de la sierra de mesa (B). Ver figura 15A-1.
2. Posicione la sierra de mesa en d6nde desea montarla

permanentemente.
3. Marque el piso a traves de los agujeros en el fondo de

las patas.
4. Mueva la sierra de mesa a un lado y perfore agujeros

piloto en las cuatro Iocalizaciones indicadas.
5. Conecte la sierra de mesa al piso utilizando la ferreteffa

apropiada (no se incluye).
72
PRECAUCI(_N ENCLAVANDO EL INTERRUPTOR DE
o Debe hacerse use de un circuito electrico individual para ENCENDIDO/APAGADO
su sierra de mesa. La sierra de mesa viene cableada de
1. Cuando la sierra de mesa no se encuentre en uso, el
antemano para el funcionamiento a 120 voltios. El cir- bot6n de "ENCENDIDO" debe estar enclavado para que
cuito no debe tener un calibre de alambre menor que #14 no pueda activarse.
AWG y debe estar protegido con un fusible de retar-
daci6n de tiempo de 15 amperios. 2, Usando el candado que se incluye con su sierra de
mesa, levante la paleta roja de "APAGADO" y coloque el
o Haga que un electricista competente repare o reponga el
candado a traves de los agujeros (C) en el lade del bot6n
cord6n daRado o gastado inmediatamente.
de "ENCENDIDO" y luego cierre el candado. Asegurese
o Antes de conectar el motor a la Ifnea de potencia, de que las Ilaves del candado hayan side quitadas y
asegurese de que el interruptor este en la posici6n de colocadas en d6nde no pueda alcanzarlas ningt_n hire.
apagado ("OFF") y asegurese de que la corriente electri- Ver la figura 17-1.
ca tenga las mismas caracteristicas que la placa de nota-
ciones del motor. Todas las conexiones de Ifnea deben 3. Para hacer uso de la sierra de mesa, abra el candado y
retfrelo del bot6n de "ENCENDIDO".
hacer buen contacto.
o El funcionamiento a bajo voltaje o con extensiones elec-
PROTECClC)N CONTRA SOBRECARGAS
tricas largas da5ara el motor.
Ti_RMICAS
o NO exponga la sierra de mesa a la Iluvia, ni haga uso de

ella en lugares humedos. Coloque el interruptor de energfa en la posici6n de
"APAGADO" y desenchufe el cord6n de energia de la
• ASEGURESE de que todas las piezas hayan sido cor-
fuente de energfa antes de efectuar o realizar cualquier
rectamente montadas y que esten en buen estado de
mantenimiento.
funcionamiento.
MANTENGA la superficie de la mesa libre de herramien- • Asegurese de que el bot6n de "APAGADO" haya side
tas y escombros antes de arrancar la sierra de mesa. presionado antes de oprimir el bot6n de restablecimiento
de sobrecarga termica.
ARRANCANDO Y DETENIENDO LA SIERRA El motor suministrado con su sierra de mesa tiene un rele
restaurable de sobrecargas termicas (D). Ver la figura 17-1.
Si el motor se apaga durante una operaci6n (cortando un
Figura 17=1
material con rapidez excesiva o usando una hoja roma, usan-
do la sierra m#,s alia de su capacidad o a bajo voltaje), pre-
sione el bot6n de APAGADO y permita que el motor se enfrfa
de tres a cinco minutes. Empuje el bot6n de sobrecargas
t@micas al costado del ensamblado del interrupter de
C ENCENDIDO/APAGADO. AsegLirese de que la hoja de la
sierra y la zona de trabajo hayan side despejadas de escom-
bros antes de reactivar la sierra. El motor ya puede encender-
se de nuevo.
ELEVANDO Y BAJANDO LA HOJA
Figura 18=1
\
A
El interruptor de ENCENDIDO/APAGADO (ON/OFF) esta
Iocalizado per debajo del riel delantero de la sierra de
mesa.
2. Para encender la sierra de mesa, optima el bot6n verde
El volante de mano de ajuste de altura de la hoja y la perilla
de "ENCENDIDO" (A) hacia adentro una media pulgada.
de cierre del volante de mane estan situados al frente del
Aviso: Existe un dispositivo de seguridad en el interruptor
gabinete, per encima de la escuadra de biselado de la hoja.
para garantizar que el interrupter debe ser presionado
Para elevar la hoja de la sierra, afloje la perilla de cierre del
completamente antes de que la sierra ARRANQUE. Ver
volante de mane (A) (en sentido antihorario) y gire el volante
la figura 17-1.
de mane (B) en sentido horatio. Cuando la hoja de la sierra
3. Para apagar la sierra de mesa, presione la paleta roja se encuentre a la altura deseada, apriete la perilla de cierre
grande de "APAGADO" ("OFF") (B) o levante la paleta y del volante de mane (en sentido horario) hasta que este aft-
presione el bot6n rojo de "APAGADO" (OFF) directa- anzada seguramente. Ver la figura 18-1.
mente. Ver la figura 17-1.
73
Para bajar la hoja de la sierra, afloje la perilla de cierre del 3, Si la hoja no se inclina a 90 grados, gire el tornillo de
volante de mane (en sentido antihorario) y gire el volante de fijaci6n (C) (en sentido antihorario) al lado izquierdo de la
mane en sentido antihorario. Cuando la hoja de la sierra se mesa de la sierra hasta que la hoja pueda posicionarse a
encuentre a la altura deseada, apriete la perilla de cierre del los 90 grades. Apriete la perilla de cierre del volante de
volante de mane (en sentido horario) hasta que este afianza- mano de biselado, Iocalizado en el lade izquierdo del
da seguramente. gabinete. Esto impedira la inclinaci6n adicional de la hoja
y verificara que el tornillo de fijaci6n este en contacto con
el tope positivo. Ver la figura 19-1.
INCLINANDO LA HOJA
4, Una vez que la hoja haya side inclinada a 90 grados,
El volante de mano de biselado de la hoja y la perilla de apriete la perilla de cierre del volante de mane de bisela-
cierre del volante de mane est_n situados en el lade izquierdo do, Iocalizado en el lade izquierdo del gabinete. Esto
del gabinete. Para aumentar el biselado de la hoja de la sier- impedira la inclinaci6n adicional de la hoja. Gire el tornillo
ra, afloje la perilla de cierre del volante de mano (A) (en senti- de fijaci6n en sentido horario hasta que entre en contacto
do antihorario) y gire el volante de mane (B) en sentido con el tope positivo.
horario. Cuando la hoja de la sierra se encuentre en su grade
deseado, apriete la perilla de cierre del volante de mane (en
sentido horario) hasta que este afianzada seguramente. Ver Figura 19=2
la figura 18-1.
Para devolver el biselado de la hoja de la sierra a cero gra-

dos, afloje la perilla del volante de mane (en sentido antiho-
rario) y gire el volante de mane en sentido antihorario.
Cuando la hoja de la sierra este a cero grados de nuevo,
entrara en contacto con el tope positive ajustable, haciendo
que la hoja se detenga. Apriete la perilla de cierre del volante
de mane (en sentido horario) hasta que este afianzada segu-
ramente.
Para inclinar el biselado de la hoja a 45 grades, afloje la peril-

la de cierre del volante de mane (en sentido antihorario) y
gire el volante de mane en sentido horario. Cuando la hoja de
la sierra este a 45 grades, har_ contacto con el tope positive
ajustable, haciendo que la hoja se detenga. Apriete la perilla
de cierre del volante de mano (en sentido horario) hasta que
este afianzada seguramente.
o E/
AJUSTANDO LOS TOPES POSITIVOS DE
BISELADO DE LA HOJA 5. Para ajustar la hoja a un tope positivo de biselado de
hoja de 45 grados, eleve la hoja de la sierra a su posi-
Figura 19=1 ci6n mas alta.
6. Usando una escuadra de combinaciones (D), revise que

la hoja este a 45 grades de la mesa de la sierra (45 gra-
dos en la escala de biselado). Ver la figura 19-2.
7, Si la hoja no se inclina a 45 grados, gire el tornillo de

fijaci6n (E) (en sentido antihorario) Iocalizado en el lade
derecho de la mesa de la sierra hasta que la hoja pueda
posicionarse a 45 grados. Apriete la perilla de cierre del
volante de mano de biselado, Iocalizada en el lado
izquierdo del gabinete. Esto impedirb, la inclinaci6n adi-
cional de la hoja y verificarb, que el tornillo de fijaci6n
este en contacto con el tope positive. Ver la figura 19-2.
8, Una vez que la hoja haya side inclinada a 45 grados,

apriete la perilla de cierre del volante de mane de bisela-
do Iocalizada en el lade izquierdo del gabinete. Esto
impedira la inclinaci6n adicional de la hoja. Gire el tornillo
de fijaci6n en sentido horario hasta que entre en contacto
con el tope positivo.
Para ajustar la hoja a un tope positivo de biselado de AJUSTE DE LA FLECHA DE BISELADO

hoja de 90 grados, eleve la hoja de la sierra (A) a su
posici6n mas alta. Ver la figura 19-1. 1. Asegurese de que la hoja este a 90 grades de la superfi-
cie de la mesa usando una escuadra de combinaciones.
2, Usando una escuadra de combinaciones (B), revise que Ver la figura 19-1.
la hoja se encuentre a 90 grades de la mesa de la sierra
(cero grades en la escala de biselado). Ver la figura 19-1.
74
Figura 20-1 1. Eleve la hoja de la sierra a su punto m_s alto.
C 2, Coloque una escuadra de combinaciones (A) sobre la

mesa de la sierra con uno de los bordes (B) de la
escuadra contra la ranura de ingletes izquierda (C). Ver
figura 20A-1.
3, Ajuste la escuadra de manera que la regla (D) solo toque

la hoja de la sierra aproximadamente 1 pulgada del
dib,metro extemo. Asegurese de que la regla no toque
ninguno de los puntos de carburo de la hoja de la sierra.
4. Sujete la regla en esta posici6n.
5. Esta dimensi6n debe ser alrededor de 5-1/2 pulgadas,

mas o menos 3/32 de pulgada.
Fig. 20A-2
2. Asegurese de que la flecha de biselado (A) indique la

marca de cero grados en la escala de biselado (B) colo-
cada en la parte frontal del gabinete. Ver la figura 20-1.
3. Para ajustar la flecha, afloje el tornillo de cabeza Phillips

(C), reposicionar la flecha de biselado y apriete el tornillo
de nuevo. Ver la figura 20-1.
ALINEAMIENTO DE LA INCLINACION
DE LA HOJA
REVISANDO EL ALINEAIVllENTO
DE LA HOJA
La inclinaci6n de la hoja es el alineamiento incorrecto de la

hoja con las ranuras de ingletes. Esto significa que cuando la
hoja no se encuentra paralela alas ranuras de ingletes, se
esta inclinando. La hoja est_ fijada paralelamente en la fabri-
ca y no debe requerir ning0n ajuste adicional. Puede revisar
esto mediante el uso de un indicador de cuadrante (no inclui-
do) o una escuadra de combinaciones (no incluida). Se 6, Gire la hoja de la sierra hacia atras para que pueda
recomienda revisar el alineamiento antes del funcionamiento tomar las medidas desde el mismo punto en la hoja de la
inicial en la siguiente manera: sierra. Ver la figura 20A-2.
7, Tome una lectura en la parte posterior de la hoja (E) con

la escuadra de combinaciones. Si hay una diferencia de
ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada m_ts de cuatro tiras de papel estandar de impresora entre
de la fuente de energfa. la regla y la hoja, se tendra que realizar un ajuste.
8, Si resulta necesario realizar el ajuste, consulte

Fig. 20A-1 "AJUSTANDO EL ALINEAMIENTO DE LA HOJA'.
AJUSTANDO EL ALINEAIVIIENTO
DE LA HOJA
El alineamiento de la hoja esta fijado de f&brica y no debe

requerir ajuste. Todas las hojas de sierra tienen cierta canti-
dad de desviaci6n. Por consiguiente, el reajuste del alinea-
miento de la hoja s61o debe realizarse si resulta necesario
(ver Revisando el Alineamiento de la Hoja).

A
75
Figura 20B=1 OPERACIONES Y AJUSTES DE LA GUiA
DE CORTE A LO LARGO
/

de la fuente de potencia.
La guia de corte a Io largo puede set utilizada a cada lado de
la hoja de la sierra. La ubicaci0n mas comL]n es en el lade
derecho. Esta guia es una gufa de enclavamiento frontal, Io
que significa que s61e podra enclavarse en el riel delantere.
La guia se desliza ale largo de los rieles delantero y trasero.
Figura 21=1
B
C G D F
B
A
Para alinear el paralelo de la hoja con la ranura de

ingletes, afloje primero las dos tuercas de cabeza hexag-
onal (A) debajo del lado izquierdo de la sierra de mesa.
Este es en el mismo lado que el volante de biselado (B).
Ver figura 20B-1.
H
Fig. 20B=2 E
C I
1, Para mover la guia de corte a Io largo, levante la agar-

radera de la gufa (A) y deslice la gufa de un lade a otro a
traves de la mesa de la sierra. Aviso: La agarradera de la
sierra esta cargada de resorte y permanecerb_ en la posi-
ci6n elevada hasta que se haga presi6n sobre ella para
bajarla. Ver la figura 21-1.
2, Para enclavar la gufa y evitar su deslizamiento de un

lade a otro, presione la agarradera de la gufa hacia
abajo.
AJUSTANDO EL DESLIZAIVIIENTO
2. Abra la cubierta del motor Iocalizada sobre el lado dere- DE LA GUIA
cho de la sierra de mesa. Afioje los dos ternillos de
cabeza hexagonal (C) Iocalizados directamente sobre la
abertura. Ver Figura 20B-2.
3. La sierra de mesa se encuentra aflojada ahora y pedrb, ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada
reposicionarse hasta que la hoja quede paralela con la de la fuente de energfa.
ranura de ingletes. Repita los pasos en "REVISANDO EL
ALINEAMIENTO DE LA HOJA". Debe consultar varies artfculos para asegurarse de que su
gufa se deslice de manera uniforme:
4, Cuando la heja este paralela a la ranura de ingletes,
apriete los cuatro ternillos de cabeza hexagonal.
5. Vuelva a revisar el alineamiento de la hoja.
6. Incline la heja a 45 grados y gire la hoja de la sierra
manualmente. Asegurese de que la hoja no haga
contacto con la pieza de inserci6n de mesa.
76
Figura 21A-1 Figura 21A-3
B G F
'1
AsegL]rese de que los tornillos de fijaci6n de nylon (A) y

las almohadillas de deslizamiento de nylon (B) esten en
sus sitios y que no esten da5adas, ranuradas o con bor- 3, Asegt_rese de que exista un espacio libre consistente
des filosos. Ver figura 21A-1. Aviso: AIgunos modelos no entre el fondo de la gufa (F) y la mesa de la sierra (G).
cuentan con el Ensamblado de Micro-Ajuste ilustrado en Este espacio debe ser igual al grosor de una moneda de
la figura 21A-1. diez centavos, aproximadamente 0.050 pulgadas. Para
ajustar el espacio libre al frente de la gufa, gire los
tornillos de fijaci6n de nylon (H) de manera uniforme.
Ver figura 21A-3.
Fig. 21A=2 Para ajustar el espacio libre en la parte posterior de la gufa,

afloje dos tornillos (I). Los tornillos est&n Iocalizados dentro
de la tapa del extremo de gufa (J). El reten de la gufa (K)
tendra que girarse hacia abajo para Iograr el acceso a los
dos tornillos. Vuelva a posicionar la tapa del extremo de la
gufa para establecer el espacio libre y apriete los dos
tornillos. Ver figura 21A-4.
Fig. 21A-4
I
2, Asegurese de que ambos rieles delantero y trasero (C)

esten paralelos a la mesa de la sierra (D). Utilice una
escuadra de combinaciones (E) para revisar el paralelo.
Ver figura 21A-2.
77
AJUSTANDO LA GUJA DE CORTE A LO LARGO
Figura 21A-5
PARALELAMENTE:
1. Para ajustar la gufa de corte a Io largo en paralelo con la
Limpiar y encerar ranura de la escuadra de ingletes, posicione la gu(a de
corte a Io largo (B) a Io largo del lade derecho (O) de la
ranura de la escuadra de ingletes derecha y enclave la
guia. La gufa de corte a Io largo debe estar paralela a la
ranura de la escuadra de ingletes. Si resulta necesario
hacer un ajuste, prosiga al siguiente paso. Ver la figura 21-1.
2. Levante la agarradera de la guia y afloje ligeramente los
tornillos de cabeza hexagonal (G). Golpee levemente la
parte posterior de la guia hasta que la gu[a de corte a Io
largo se encuentre paralela con la ranura de la escuadra
de ingletes. Enclave la gu[a y vuelva a apretar los tornillos
de cabeza hexagonal. Desenclave la gu[a y muevala de
un lado a otro. Enclavela y revfsela de nuevo para ase-
gurar que este paralela. Ver la figura 21-1.
AJUSTANDO EL ENCUADRADO DE LA GUiA DE CORTE

A LO LARGO:
1. Para ajustar el encuadrado de la gufa de corte a Io largo
con la superficie de la mesa, enclave la gufa en su sitio y
ASEGURESE de leer y obedecer todas las direcciones y
coloque una escuadra sobre la mesa de la sierra y contra
advertencias en el limpiador. el lade de la gufa de corte a Io largo. Si la gu[a de corte a
Limpie los rieles delantero y posterior con alcohol de fro- Io largo esta mal dispuesto, prosiga al siguiente paso.
tar o limpiador de frenos automotores. Evite derramar el 2. Desenclave la agarradera de la gufa de corte a Io largo y
limpiador sobre las superficies pintadas. Tras la limpieza, ajuste uno o ambos tornillos de fijaci6n (H) para cuadrar
encere los rieles delantero y trasero completamente. la gufa de corte a Io largo con la mesa de la sierra.
Para los modelos que dispongan del ensamblado de Enclave la agarradera de la gufa y vuelva a revisar.
Micro-Ajuste, no encere la zona del riel delantero en
donde la rueda de goma del Micro-Ajuste hace contacto. PRECAUClON: Mantenga un espacio libre de aproximada-
mente 1 mm entre la mesa de la sierra y el fondo de la gufa.
AJUSTANDO LA ESCALA DE CORTE A LO LARGO Diez hojas de papel de impresora son aproximadamente 1
mm. Ver la figura 21-1.
Para ajustar la escala derecha, alinee el lade izquierdo
de la guia (B) a cierta distancia del lade derecho (C) de AJUSTANDO LA PRESION DE SUJECION:
la ranura de la escuadra de ingletes derecha y enclave la 1, Una vez que la gu(a de corte a Io largo se encuentre
gu/a. Ver la figura 21-1.
paralela con la ranura de la escuadra de ingletes, revise
2, Utilice una cinta de medir para medir la distancia desde si existe una fuerza de sujeci6n adecuada para sostener
el lade derecho de la hoja de la sierra hasta el lado la gufa de corte a Io largo en su sitio. Si puede levantar
izquierdo de la gufa. la gufa de corte a Io largo del riel delantero mientras que
se encuentra enclavada, significa que requiere ajuste.
3, Afloje los dos tornillos que conectan el cursor (E) al lado
derecho de la cruceta de la gu/a. Ver la figura 21-1. 2, Para ajustar la presi6n de sujeci6n de la gufa de corte a
Io largo, afloje ligeramente los dos tornillos de cabeza
4. Alinee el cursor con la escala (F) de tal manera que la hueca hexagonal debajo del cuerpo de la gufa (I). Para
raya negra delgada (D) se encuentre en el mismo aumentar la presi6n de sujeci6n, gire el tornillo de fijaci6n
numero que la distancia medida en el paso 4. Apriete los (J) en sentido horario; para reducir la presi6n de suje-
tornillos del cursor. ci6n, gire el tornillo de fijaci6n en sentido antihorario y
apriete ambos tornillos de cabeza hueca hexagonal.
5, Para ajustar la escala izquierda, remueva la gufa de la
Aviso: $61o realice ajustes peque5os al tornillo de fijaci6n
mesa y reposici6nela en el lade izquierdo de la hoja de la
(J) y revise de nuevo. Ver la figura 21-1.
sierra. Alinee el lade derecho de la guia a cierta distancia
del lade izquierdo de la ranura de la escuadra de ingletes
izquierda y enclave la gufa. Figura 21=2
6, Utilice una cinta de medir para medir la distancia desde
el lade izquierdo de la hoja de la sierra hasta el lado K
derecho de la gufa.
7, Afloje los dos tornillos que conectan el cursor al lado
izquierdo de la cruceta de la gufa.
8. Alinee el cursor con la escala de tal manera que la raya
negra delgada se encuentre en el mismo numero que la
distancia medida en el paso 6. Apriete los tornillos del
cursor.
La gufa de corte a Io largo debe estar debidamente alineada

con la ranura de la escuadra de ingletes para impedir los
"contragolpes" durante las operaciones de corte a Io largo.
78
RETEN TRASERO: PRECAUCION
Durante la realizaci6n de operaciones especiales, come el
Para reducir al mfnimo la cantidad en que la gu/a (K) se
corte de moldaduras, resulta necesario afiadir un refrentado
separa de la mesa de la sierra, sencillamente vire el
de madera (A) a uno e ambos lados de la guia de corte ale
reten posterior (L) hacia debajo de manera que quede
largo (B). Un refrenado de 3/4 pulg. a la gufa de corte a Io
debajo del riel posterior. Esto limita la cantidad en que
largo resulta adecuado para la mayorfa de los trabajos,
podra elevarse la parte posterior de la guia. Ver la figura
aunque existen trabajos ocasionales que podran requerir
21-2.
refrentados de 1 pulg. Ver la figura 22-2.
USANDO LA GUiA AUXILIAR SOBRE LA PRECAUClON
GUiA DE CORTE A LO LARGO Debe hacerse use de un refrentado de madera durante el
corte a Io largo de materiales delgados, come los paneles,
para evitar que el material quede atascado entre el fondo de
la gufa de corte a Io largo y la superficie de la mesa de la
o ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconecta- sierra.
da de la fuente de energfa.
MICROAJUSTE DE LA GUiA DE CORTE
o PARA EVITAR LOS CONTRAGOLPES: posicione siem-
pre la gufa auxiliar al menos 2 pulgadas al frente de la A LO LARGO
hoja de la sierra cuando vaya a utilizarla como tope de
parada para el corte transversal.
Jamas utilice la gufa auxiliar de aluminio cuando vaya a ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada
realizar una operaci6n con el cabezal de corte de de la fuente de energfa cuando vaya a realizar ajustes.
moldaduras o de fresa rotativa de ranurar. Para estas
operaciones, debe hacerse uso de una guia auxiliar de Figura 23=1
madera (no incluida).
Figura 22=1 A
1. Aviso: Cuando vaya a utilizar la gufa auxiliar suministrada

con su sierra, debe restar 1 pulg. de la escala de corte a
Io largo. Esto se debe a que la gu/a auxiliar tiene un
grosor de 1 pulgada.
2. Cuando vaya a utilizar la gufa auxiliar como tope de tro-
ceado, debe montar primero la gufa auxiliar a la gufa de
corte a Io largo.
3, Posicione el comienzo de la gufa auxiliar (A) a por Io
menos 2 pulgadas al frente de la hoja de la sierra (B) y 1, Asegurese de que la guia de corte a Io largo no este
apriete ambas perillas de sujeci6n (C). Ver la figura 22-1. enclavada.
4, Siesta haciendo uso de la escala de corte a Io largo 2. Para engranar el microajuste, presione la perilla (A). Ver
para fijar la Iongitud del corte, r4stele 1 pulg. a la escala
la figura 23-1.
de corte a Io largo para la medida del corte de acabado.
AsegL]rese de que la gufa de corte a Io largo este 3. Gire la perilla en sentido horario para mover la gufa de
enclavada antes de realizar cualquier corte.
corte a Io largo a la izquierda, yen sentido antihorario
para moverla a la derecha.
Figura 22=2
A
79
AJUSTE DE LA PIEZA DE INSERCI(_N Figura 25=1
DE MESA

C /
de la fuente de potencia.
Figura 24=1
B
1. Asegurese de que el interruptor este "APAGADO" y

desconecte el eord6n de energ[a de la fuente de energ[a.
1. La pieza de inserci6n de mesa (A) debe estar nivelada
siempre con la mesa de la sierra (B). Para ajustar la 2. Abra la cubierta del motor y verifique en la etiqueta del
pieza de inserci6n de la mesa, afloje y remueva el perno motor (A) que el motor es de doble voltaje. Ver la figura
de reten de la pieza de inserci6n de mesa (C). Ver la 25-1.
figura 24-1.
2. Coloque una regla sobre el frente y la parte trasera de la 3. Si la etiqueta del motor declara que es de doble voltaje,
pieza de inserci6n de mesa. Revise que la pieza de quite la cubierta de la caja de empalmes (B) del motor
inserci6n este perfectamente nivelada con la mesa de la (C). Ver la figura 25-1.
sierra.
4. Usando el diagrama de cableado en el interior de la
3. Para nivelar la pieza de inserci6n de la mesa, gire el cubierta de la caja de empalmes, reconecte los avances
tornillo o los tornillos de ajuste de fijaci6n (D) segun Io del motor para el funcionamiento a 240 voltios.
necesario y vuelva a revisar. Ver la figura 24-1.
4. Una vez que la pieza de inserci6n de mesa este nivela- 5. Reponga la cubierta de la caja de empalmes y cierre la
cubierta del motor.
da, afiance la pieza con el perno de reten que rue
removido en el paso 1.
6. Reponga el enchufe de 120 voltios por uno de 240
5, La pieza de inserci6n de mesa viene equipada con un agu- voltios clasificado por UL/CSA para la corriente del motor.
jero de dedo (E) para la remoci6n f&cil. Ver la figura 24-1.
7. El interruptor de ARRANQUE / PARADA es de 4 polos y
CAMBIANDO EL VOLTAJE DEL MOTOR no necesita ser modificado.
• ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconecta-

da de la fuente de potencia antes de trabajar con el
motor.
• Haga que un electricista competente realice todas las
conexiones electricas. Deben acatarse todos los c6digos
locales y estatales.
El motor suministrado con la sierra de mesa es un motor
monofasico de doble voltaje, 120/240-voltios. El motor viene
cableado de fabrica para el funcionamiento a 120 voltios.
Para cambiar su sierra de mesa al funcionamiento a 240
voltios, prosiga con las siguientes instrucciones. Tambien
resulta necesario reemplazar el enchufe de 120 voltios sumin-
istrado con la sierra de mesa por un enchufe de 120 voltios
clasificado por UL / CSA (no incluido) y apropiado para los
240 voltios y la corriente clasificada de la sierra. La sierra de
mesa con el enchufe de 240 voltios s61o debe conectarse a
un tomacorrientes que disponga de la misma configuraci6n
que el enchufe. No hay adaptadores disponibles para el
enchufe de 240 voltios ni tampoco debe usarse ninguno.
80
CAMBIANDO LA HOJA DE LA SIERRA Figura 26A=1
• Conmute el interruptor de energ[a a APAGADO y des-

enchufe el cord6n de potencia de su fuente de potencia
mientras que efectua el recambio de la hoja de la sierra.
o SOLO UTlUCE hojas con diametro de 10 pulg. y con

agujeros de eje de 5/8 pulg., tasados a 3800 RPM o mas
alto.
Figura 26=1
E
B
1. Para ajustar el soporte del hendidor delantero (A), afloje

los dos tornillos de cabeza hexagonal (B). Ver la figura
26A-1.
1, Remueva el protector de hoja y el hendidor.

2. Remueva el perno de reten de la pieza de inserci6n de Fig. 26A=2
mesa y remueva la pieza de inserci6n de mesa.
3. Desenclave el cierre del volante de mano de elevaciOn /
bajado y eleve la hoja de la sierra a su altura maxima.
4. Se suministran dos Ilaves con la sierra de mesa. Coloque
una Ilave de boca (A) sobre la parte plana del eje de la
sierra para evitar que gire. Coloque la Ilave de extremo
cerrado (B) sobre la tuerca del eje (C). Gire la Ilave de la
tuerca del eje hacia el frente de la sierra para aflojarla.
Remueva la tuerca del eje, la pestafia de la hoja (D) y la
hoja de la sierra (E). Ver la figura 26-1.
5, Monte la nueva hoja de la sierra. Asegt]rese de que los \
dientes apunten hacia abajo al frente de la mesa de la
sierra y monte la pestafia de la hoja y la tuerca del eje.
Usando ambas Ilaves de hoja en la manera antes men-
cionada, apriete la tuerca del eje en la direcci6n contraria
a la que fue aflojada.
6, Reponga la pieza de inserci6n de mesa y apriete el
perno de reten de la pieza de inserci6n de mesa.
7. Reponga el protector de hoja y el hendidor. 2, Coloque una regla (C) a Io largo del lado izquierdo de la
hoja (D) y ajuste el soporte el hendidor delantero para
alinear el hendidor (E) a la hoja. Ver figura 26A-2.
ALINEANDO EL SOPORTE DEL HENDIDOR 3, Vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos de cabeza hueca
hexagonal despues de haber alineado el hendidor.
4. Si resulta necesario, ajuste el soporte del hendidor poste-
ASEGORESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada rior (F) asegurandose que el hendidor complete este en
de la fuente de energ[a. I[nea con la hoja de la sierra. Ver figura 26A-2.
5, Vuelva a revisar para asegurarse de que el hendidor siga
atin cuadrado con la mesa de la sierra. Si se requiere
efectuar algun ajuste, consulte PROTECTOR DE HOJA Y
ENSAMBLADO DEL HENDIDOR.
81
OPERAC[ON Y AJUSTE DE LA ESCUADRA 7, Empuje el embolo hacia adentro y haga ajustes al tornillo
DE [NGLETES de parada (G) de manera que toque el embolo, apretan-
do la tuerca de cierre despues. Ver la figura 27-2.
8, Vuelva a revisar el angulo del tope positive con la hoja de
la sierra. Inserte la barra de gufa dentro de la ranura de
ASEGURESE de que la sierra de mesa este desconectada la escuadra de ingletes y deslice la escuadra de ingletes
de la fuente de energfa cuando vaya a realizar ajustes. hasta la hoja de la sierra.
Figura 27=1 g, Para revisar, coloque una escuadra contra la hoja de la

sierra y el cuerpo de la escuadra de ingletes. Si se
requieren ajustes adicionales, repita los pasos anteriores.
B 10. Para fijar ambos topes positivos de 45 grados, repita los
pasos anteriores.
OPERACION DE LOS TOPES DE

ABRAZADERA Y DE LA GU[A

de la fuente de energfa cuando realice los ajustes.
1. La escuadra de ingletes dispone de topes positivos
ajustabies a 0 grados y positivo/negativo 45 grados, o Figura 28=1
puede set establecido manualmente a cualquier angulo
entre positivo/negativo 60 grados. G
2. Para girar el cuerpo de la escuadra de ingletes (A), afloje

la perilla (B) y extraiga el embolo (C). Gire el cuerpo de
la escuadra de ingletes al angulo deseado y apriete la B C
3.
perilla. Ver la figura 27-1.
Para girar al siguiente tope positivo, extraiga el embolo,
gire el cuerpo de la escuadra de ingletes, luego vuelva a
\
empujar el embolo hacia adentre y siga girando el cuerpo
de la escuadra de ingletes hasta que se detenga en el
siguiente tope positivo.
4. Para ajustar los topes positivos a 0 grades, afloje la
perilla, extraiga el embolo y dele vuelta a la escuadra
de ingletes.
Figura 27=2
D 1, La abrazadera de material (A) puede set posicionada

dentro y fuera afiojando las dos perillas (B) y deslizando
el cuerpo de la abrazadera hacia adentro o afuera.
Vuelva a apretar las perillas cuando se encuentren en la
posici6n deseada. Vet la figura 28-1.
2, La abrazadera de material tiene una liberaci6n rapida
que le permite posicionar la abrazadera arriba o abajo
con rapidez. Para engranar la liberaci6n rapida, optima el
gatillo hacia arriba (C) y sujetelo. La almohadilla de
abrazadera (D) caer_ o podra ser elevada. Para liberar,
suelte el gatillo. Ahora podra darle vuelta a la perilla (E)
para aplicar presi6n de abrazadera. Ver la figura 28-1.
3, El tope de parada de la gufa (F) puede reposicionarse a
Io largo de la gufa afiojando el tornillo de cabeza hueca
hexagonal (G). Deslice el tope de parada de la gufa a la
posici6n deseada y apriete el tornillo de cabeza hueca
5, Afioje la tuerca de cierre (D) 3 6 4 vueltas. Ver la figura hexagonal. Si no se requiere el tope de parada de la
27-2. gu[a, se le puede almacenar detr&s de la gufa para que
no estorbe. Ver la figura 28-1.
6. Coloque una escuadra contra la barra de gufa (E) y el
frente del cuerpo de la escuadra de ingletes. Cuadre el
cuerpo de la escuadra de ingletes con la barra de gufa y
apriete la perilla. Ver la figura 27-2.
82
CORTE TRANSVERSAL Figura 29=2
El corte transversal exige el use de la escuadra de ingletes
(A) para posicionar y guiar el material (B). Ver la figura 29-1.
El uso de aditamentos y accesorios que no sean de

Craftsman podrb, resultar en el riesgo de lesiones al usuario o
dare a la sierra de mesa. E
Figura 29=1
\\
D A \
GUJA AUXIMAR
Para mayor seguridad y conveniencia, la escuadra de

ingletes puede equiparse con una guia auxiliar (E) si no es
que viene equipada con una. Si la gufa auxiliar no ha sido
suministrada con su sierra, es posible comprar una como
accesorio o puede hacerse una a partir de un pedazo dimen-
sional de madera dura. Esta gufa auxiliar puede afianzarse al
frente de la escuadra de ingletes usando dos tornillos (no
incluidos) a traves de las ranuras (no ilustradas) en el cuerpo
de la escuadra de ingletes. Ver figura 29-2.
Figura 29=3
PARA ELCORTETRANSVERSAL: F
1. Coloque el material contra la escuadra de ingletes y
avance tanto la escuadra de ingletes come el material
hacia la hoja de la sierra (C). Ver figura 29-1. d. H K
Aviso: La escuadra de ingletes podra utilizarse en cualquiera
de las ranuras de escuadra de ingletes. Durante el corte de
biselado (con la hoja inclinada) haga use de la ranura
derecha de la escuadra de ingletes para que la hoja se incline
en el sentido opuesto a la escuadra de ingletes y de sus
manes.
J
2. Inicie el corte con lentitud y sujete el material con firmeza
contra la escuadra de ingletes y la mesa.
Para evitar heridas graves, no se agarre ni toque JAM_,S la

parte del material que va a cortarse (D).
3. Siga cortando hasta que el material haya side cortado a CALIBRE DE TROCEADO
la mitad. 1, Cuando vaya a realizar el corte transversal de un numero
4. Deslice la escuadra de ingletes y el material hacia el de piezas a la misma extensi6n, afiance un bloque de
punto de comienzo otra vez. madera (F) a la guia (J) para utilizarlo come calibre de
troceado. Es importante que dicho bloque de madera
Aviso: Antes de deslizar el material nuevamente, mueva el siempre sea posicionado al frente de la hoja de la sierra.
material hacia el lado un poco para alejarlo ligeramente de la Ver la figura 29-3.
hoja de la sierra.
PRECAUCION
Cuando vaya a hacer use del bloque come calibre de corte,
JAM_,S recoja ningLin trozo de material descartado de la es muy importante que la parte trasera del bloque este posi-
cionado de tal manara que el material quede libre del bloque
mesa mientras que la sierra este funcionando. Espere hasta
antes de entrar en la hoja.
que la hoja de la sierra se haya detenido por completo.
Jam&s utilice la guia come calibre de corte durante el corte

transversal.
83
Durante el corte transversal de un cierto numero de piezas a utilizados. El hendidor cuenta con dedos anticontragolpe (D)
la misma Iongitud, se podra abrazar un bloque de madera a para impedir que el material haga contragolpe, y el ensambla-
la gufa para funcionar como calibre de corte en la forma do del hendidor para impedir que la entalladura de la madera
ilustrada. Es importante que este bloque de madera siempre se cierre y atasque la hoja. Ver la figura 30-1.
se encuentre posicionado al frente de la hoja de la sierra,
1. Con el material libre de la hoja de la sierra, arranque el
seg0n Io ilustrado. Una vez que se haya determinado la
motor.
extensi6n de corte, afiance la gufa y utilice la escuadra de
ingletes para alimentar el material a la hoja. Este bloque de 2. Coloque el material sobre la mesa de la sierra con el
madera permite que la pieza troceada se mueva con libertad borde recto contra la guia.
a Io largo de la superficie de la mesa sin que se produzca
ningun agarrotamiento entre la gufa y la mesa de la sierra, 3. Avance el material lentamente, sujetandolo hacia abajo y
reduciendo asf la posibilidad del contragolpe y lesiones al contra la gufa, y luego hacia la hoja de la sierra.
usuario.
Aviso: El material puede alimentarse a traves de la hoja de la
Aviso: Este bloque permite que el pedazo de material descar- sierra con una o dos manes, segun el tamaRo.
tado de troceado se mueva libremente a Io largo de la super- 4, Despues de que el material se encuentre mas alia de la
ficie de la mesa sin atascarse entre la gufa y la hoja,
hoja de la sierra y de los dedos anticontragolpe, podra
reduciendo asi la posibilidad del contragolpe y las heridas al
retirar su mane del material. Cuando haya hecho esto, el
usuario.
material o permanecera en la mesa, o se inclinara ligera-
2, Una vez que la extensi6n de troceado haya sido determi- mente para quedar atrapada per el extreme trasero de la
nada, enclave la gufa y deslice el material a Io largo de la gufa, o se deslizar& de la mesa hacia el suelo. Alter-nati-
superficie de la mesa hasta que haga contacto con el vamente, la alimentaci6n podra proseguir hasta el final
bloque. Utilice la escuadra de ingletes (K) para alimentar de la mesa, despues de Io cual el material podra levan-
el material hacia la hoja. tarse y traerse nuevamente a Io largo del borde externo
de la gufa.
5. La parte troceada del material permanece sobre la mesa

y no se toca hasta que la hoja de la sierra se haya
Para evitar los contragolpes durante el uso del bloque (F)
detenido por complete.
come calibre de troceado, es muy importante que el extreme
trasero del bloque (G) sea posicionado de tal manera que el
PRECAUClON
material (H) este despejado del bloque antes de que ingrese
en la hoja (I). Jamas utilice le gufa (J) como calibre de trocea- Cuando vaya a cortar a Io largo cualquier material m_s largo
do durante el corte transversal. Vea la figura 29-3. que tres pies, se recomienda que el material sea apoyado
detr_s de la sierra de mesa para evitar que caiga. Puede
comprarse un estante de rodillos para apoyar los materiales
CORTE A LO LARGO largos detras de una sierra de mesa.
PRECAUClON
Si el material a cortarse tiene menos de 4 pulg. de ancho,
• JAM_,S se pare en la ffnea del trayecto de la hoja de la debe hacerse use siempre de una varilla de empuje (E) o
sierra durante el corte a Io largo. gufa para mantener sus manes alejadas de la hoja de la
sierra. Ver figura 30-2.
, SlEMPRE mantenga las manes y los dedos alejados de
la hoja de la sierra.
Figura 30-1 Figure 30-2
C
Puede comprarse una Gufa Craftsman de accesorio como
ayuda cuando vaya a efectuar cortes angostos. Vea la
El corte a Io largo es la operaci6n de realizar un corte en secci6n "ACCESORIOS Y ADITAMENTOS" en este manual.
direcci6n del grano del material. La gufa de corte a Io largo
(A) se utiliza para posicionar y guiar el material. Puesto que el
material se empuja a Io largo de la gu(a, debe disponer de un
borde recto y hacer contacto con la mesa de la sierra. El pro-
tector de hoja (B) y el ensamblado del hendidor (C) deben ser
84
CONJUNTO DE FRESAS ROTATIVAS DE Los dientes de las fresas rotativas y las astilladoras tienen
RANURAR gradaci6n. Los dientes de las fresas rotativas y las astillado-
ras deben estar dispuestas de tal forma que la gradaci6n de
cada diente este solapada con la del pr6ximo diente. Las
gradaciones de la fresa rotativa (C) y la astilladora (D) se
solapan como se ilustra en la Figura 26-3. Puede utilizarse un
El protector de hoja y el ensamblado del hendidor no pueden
calzo (E) segtin sea necesario para controlar el ancho exacto
utilizarse durante el fresado o moldurado y debe bascularse
de una fresa rotativa. Ver las figuras 31-2 y 31-3.
hacia la parte trasera de la sierra. El protector de hojas debe
reensamblarse una vez que haya completado el fresado o
moldurado.
Figura 31=3
Figura 31=1
B
.--.D
J
Cuando el ancho de la fresa rotativa es de 13/16 pulg., no

puede hacerse uso de la pestaSa exterior del eje (F). $61o
debe usarse la tuerca del eje (G). Apriete la tuerca del eje
contra el cuerpo de la fresa rotativa. No pierda la pestafla
A exterior del eje, ya que sera necesaria durante la reconexi6n
de la hoja al eje de la sierra. Ademas debe hacerse uso de
El fresado es un corte que no es pasante o directo y que pro- una pieza de inserci6n de mesa para la fresa rotativa (H) (no
duce una muesca cuadrada en el material. La mayor[a de los incluida) en vez de la pieza de inserci6n de mesa est&ndar.
conjuntos de fresas rotativas (no incluidas) estan confor- Ver figura 31-4.
madas por dos fresas rotativas exteriores (A) y cuatro o cinco
astilladoras interiores (B). Pueden colocarse calzos (E) entre
las fresas y astilladores para variar el ancho de un corte de Figura 31=4
fresa ligeramente. No deben colocarse mas de dos calzos
juntos entre un conjunto de fresas o astilladoras. Los calzos
pueden estar hechos de papel pesado, bronce o metal. Las
distintas combinaciones de fresas y astilladoras se utilizan
para el ranurado de 1/8 pulg. a 13/16 pulg. en la construcci6n
de anaqueles, la formaci6n de juntas, espigado, ranurado,
etc. Ver las figuras 31-1,31-2 y 31-3.
Figura 31=2
H
(NO INCLUIDA)
E
ser usados durante el fresado y deben bascularse hacia la
parte trasera de la sierra.
85
Figura 31-5

utilizarse durante el fresado o el moldurado y deben bascu-
larse hacia la parte trasera de la sierra. El protector de hoja
\ debe reensamblarse cuando haya terminado.
Figura 32-2
\
\ o
La Figura 31-5 muestra una operaci6n tfpica de fresado

haciendo uso de la escuadra de ingletes.
o Jamas utilice el cabezal de fresa rotativa en la posici6n E

(NO INCLUIDA) _ ...........
de biselado.
o Siempre instale el protector de hojas y el ensamblado del
hendidor despues de haber completado la operaci6n de
fresado. La Figura 32-2 muestra el cabezal de moldurado montado al
eje de la sierra.
FRESA DE MOLDURAR Si la pesta_a exterior del eje (D) no puede utilizarse con el
cabezal de moldurado, apriete la tuerca del eje (E) contra el
El moldurado es el cortar una figura en el borde o la cara del
material. El corte de moldurados con una fresa de moldurar cuerpo del cabezal. No pierda la pestaRa exterior del eje, ya
que ser_ necesaria durante la reconexi6n de la hoja al eje de
(no incluida) en la sierra circular representa una operaci6n
la sierra. Ademas debe hacerse uso de una pieza de inser-
rapida, segura y limpia. Las distintas formas de cuchillas
ci6n de mesa para el moldurado (F) (no incluida) en vez de la
disponibles permiten que el operario produzca casi cualquier
pieza de inserci6n de mesa estandar. Ver la figura 32-2.
clase de moldurado, tales como distintos tipos de moldurados
de esquinas, marcos para cuadros, bordes de mesa, etc.
Figura 32-3
Figura 32-1
G
H
./
C
Durante el uso del cabezal de moldurado, resulta necesario
aRadir un refrentado de madera (G) a la cara de la gufa de
El cabezal de moldurar consiste de un cabezal de corte (A)
corte a Io largo (H). El refrentado se conecta a la gufa
en el que puede montar distintos tipos de cuchillas de acero
mediante el uso de afianzadores. Un refrentado de fl pulg. es
(B). Cada una de las tres cuchillas en un conjunto esta fijada
adecuado para la mayor[a de los trabajos, aunque ciertos
a una ranura en el cabezal de corte y est_ afianzada segura-
trabajos ocasionalmente podran exigir un refrentado de 1
mente con un tornillo. Las ranuras de las cuchillas (C) deben
pulg. Ver la figura 32-3.
conservarse libres de aserrfn, Io que impedirfa que la fresa
tuviese el asiento correcto. Ver la figura 32-1.
86
Posicione el refrentado de madera sobre el cabezal de corte PRECAUCI6N
con el cabezal de corte per debajo de la superficie de la
mesa. Encienda la sierra y eleve el cabezal de corte lenta- • Durante el moldurado a contrahilo debe hacerse uso de la
mente. El cabezal de corte cortara su propia ranura en el escuadra de ingletes. La velocidad de alimentaci6n debe
refrentado de madera. reducirse al final del corte para impedir el astillado.
• En todos los cortes, preste atenci6n al grano, haciendo los

cortes en la misma direcci6n que el grano siempre que sea
posible.
* Jamas utilice el cabezal de moldurado en la posici6n de
biselado.
* Jamas pase el material entre la guia y el cabezal de moldu-

rado, ya que la madera de configuraci6n irregular producira
contragolpes.
AJUSTES DE REPERCUSION PARA LOS PROTEGIENDO LA MESA DE HIERRO

ENSAMBLADOS DE ELEVACI()N/BAJADO MOLDEADO CONTRA LA OXIDACKDN
DE LA HOJA E INCLINACION DE LA HOJA
Se deben realizar los siguientes ajustes si se detecta ASEGURESE de haber apagado la energfa ("OFF") y des-
cualquier holgura en los ensamblados de elevaci6n/bajado o enchufe el cord6n de potencia de su fuente de energia.
inclinaci6n de la hoja.
El medic ambiente y la frecuencia del contacto humano
pueden tener un efecto sumamente nocivo sobre las superfi-
cies de hierro moldeado sin pintar. El vaho, la humedad y los
Coloque el interruptor de energia en "APAGADO" y des- aceites (provenientes de la mano humana) pueden hacer que
enchufe el cord6n de energia de su fuente de energia cuando las superficies de hierro moldeado sin pintar se darien o se
vaya a realizar ajustes. oxiden, asi que resulta importante Ilevar a cabo mantenimien-
to rutinario para que su sierra de mesa se conserve come
AVISO: En la siguiente ilustraci6n, la sierra de mesa ha sido nueva. La limpieza y el encerado de las superficies de hierro
colocada boca abajo y se ha quitado la hoja de la sierra para moldeado, siguiendo un programa de mantenimiento regular,
mayor claridad. se recomiendan come sigue:
Figura 33-1 Para limpiar y mantener las superficies de hierro sin

pintar:
C
• Aplique una capa gruesa de WD-40 sobre la superficie
de hierro moldeado sin pintar.
Utilice una almohadilla de lana de acero fina para pulir el

hierro moldeado sin pintar. Asegurese de pulir en sentido
"del frente a parte posterior" solamente. El pulido de lado
a lade aparecera en el hierro finamente moldeado como
una lacra, defecto o ralladura.
Vuelva a aplicar WD-40 para pulir la superficie de hierro

moldeado sin pintar hasta que haya quitado las manchas
o la oxidaci6n. Asegurese de usar el mismo movimiento
de frotaci6n del frente a parte posterior para evitar rayar
o dafiar la superficie de hierro moldeado.
B A
Despues de haber quitado todas las manchas y/o oxi-
daci6n, limpie todo el aceite y suciedad de la sierra de
mesa, utilizando para ello un pa5o o trapo suave.
1. Para ajustar el ensamblado de elevaci6n/bajado de la
hoja, afloje la tuerca de cierre (A) y gire el casquillo
Finalmente, necesita aplicar una cera automotriz en
excentrico (B) hasta haber quitado toda la holgura del
pasta de buena calidad a todas las superficies de hierro
ensamblado. Luego apriete la tuerca de cierre de nuevo.
moldeado sin pintar. Esto le ayudarb, a proteger la sierra
Ver la figura 33-1.
contra la oxidaci6n come resultado del contacto adicional
2. Para ajustar el ensamblado de inclinaci6n de la hoja, con la humedad o las manos aceitosas.
apriete la tuerca de cierre (C) y gire la excentrica (D)
hasta haber quitado toda la holgura del ensamblado.
Luego apriete la tuerca de cierre de nuevo. Ver la figura
33-1.
87
LUBRICACK_N
La sierra de mesa tiene cojinetes lubricados sellados en la S61o personal competente debe realizar reparaciones a la
carcasa del motor que no requieren lubricaci6n adicional per sierra de mesa. Comun[quese con su Centre de Servicio
parte del operario. Sears mas cercano para obtener servicio autorizado. Las
reparaciones desautorizadas o el reemplazo con piezas que
no sean de fabrica podrfan ocasionar lesiones graves al
LIMPIEZA operario y daRo a la sierra de mesa.
Con la sierra de mesa desenchufada, sople aire a baja pre-

si6n sobre el motor para quitar el polvo o la suciedad. No
debe hacerse uso de una presi6n de aire en exceso de 50
RS.I., ya que el aire de alta presi6n puede daRar el ais-
lamiento.EI operario debe utilizar protecci6n ocular siempre
cuando vaya a utilizar aire comprimido.
No permita que se acumulen astillas y polvo debajo de la

sierra de mesa. Mantenga la zona limpia yen buen estado.
PRECAUCION: NO UTILICE MATERIALES INFLAMABLES

para limpiar la sierra de mesa.
88
Para evitar herirse a si mismo o daRar la sierra de mesa, conmute el interrupter de energfa a "APAGADO" y desenchufe el cord6n
de potencia del tomacorrientes antes de realizar cualquier ajuste.
PROBLEMA CAUSAS POSIBLES SOLUCION

Motor no arranca: 1. Interruptor no fue oprimido a suficiente profundidad 1. Presione el interruptor fi pulg. hacia adentro o asegurese de que el
o interruptor en posicion de apagado. interruptor este en la posici6n de "encendidd'.
2. Interruptor defectuoso. 2. Haga reernplazar el interruptor.
3. Capacitador defectuoso. 3. Haga reernplazar el capacitador.
4. Bajo voltaje de line& 4. Corrija la condici6n de bajo voltaje de h'nea. Si la sierra esta
enchufada a una extensi6n, enchufe la sierra directarnente al torn
corrientes.
5. Motor defectuoso. Haga reernplazar el motor.
AVlSO: El 3 y 4 deben ser realizados por un tecnico de servicio
cornpetente.
Motor se atasca, se Sobrecarga del circuito. 1. Reduzca la carga del circuito (apague otros enseres).
dispara la sobrecarga Bajo voltaje de linea. 2. Corrija la condici6n de bajo voltaje de line& Revise el voltaje de
t6rrnica o se abren los
linea con un medidor multiple. Si la sierra esta enchufada a una
disyuntores de circuito extensi6n, enchufe la sierra directamente al tomacorrientes.
con frecuencia:
3. Sobrecarga del motor. 3. Reduzca la carga del motor, reduzca la tasa de alirnentaci6n del
material empujado hacia la hoja,
4. Fusibles incorrectos en los disyuntores de circuito. 4. Haga que un electricista cornpetente instale los fusibles
correctos en los disyuntores de circuito.
5. Cortocircuito del motor; conexiones sueltas o 5. Inspeccione las terrninaciones en el motor por si hay aislarniento
aislarniento gastado en los avances. daSado y/o cables cortocircuitados y rep6ngalos. Revise todas
las conexiones de avances de fuerza,
Motor arranca lenta- 1. Bajo voltaje de line& 1. Corrija la condici6n de bajo voltaje de line& Revise el voltaje de
mente o no aJcanza linea con un rnedidor multiple. Si la sierra esta enchufada a una
plena velocidad: extensi6n, enchufe la sierra directamente al tomacorrientes.
2. Bobinados defectuosos del motor. 2. Haga reernplazar el motor.
3. Capacitador defectuoso. 3. Haga reernplazar el capacitador.
Motor marcha caliente: 1. Circulaci6n de aire restringida debido a la acurnulaci6n 1. Lirnpie el polvo y restaure la circulaci6n normal de aire
de polvo. alrededor del motor.
2. Sobrecarga del motor. 2. Reduzca la carga del motor.
Resulta difi'cil girar los 1. La Perilla de Cierre del Volante de Mano no ha sido 1. Afloje la Perilla de Cierre del Volante de Mano.
volantes de mano: aflojada.
2. Acurnulaci6n de polvo sobre los engranajes de 2. Limpie los ensamblados de engranaje de inclinaci6n o biselado.
inclinaci6n o biselado dentro del gabinete.
Escuadra de ingletes 1. Suciedad en la ranura de la escuadra de ingletes y 1. Limpie la ranura y la barra de la escuadra de ingletes.
no se mueve de manera en la barra de la escuadra de ingletes.
uniforme: 2. Tornillos de fijacion en la barra de la escuadra de 2. Ajuste los tornillos de fijaci6n en la barra de la escuadra de ingletes.
ingletes estan desajustados.
Material se atasca, se 1. Hoja rorna. 1. Afile o reponga la hqa,

quema o detiene el 2. Tabla alabeada o torcida, 2. Reponga la tabla.
motor durante el corte a
3. Gul'a de corte a Io largo no esta paralela a la hoja de 3. Ver "Alinearniento de Gul'a" en Operaci6n y Ajustes.
Io largo:
la sierra.
La hoja de la sierra no 1. Hoja rorna. 1. Afile o reponga la hoja,

corta correctamente a 2. Ajuste incorrecto de la flecha indicadora, 2. Ajuste la flecha indicadora de biselado.
90 o 45 grados:
3. Fijaci6n incorrecta de los topes positivos. 3. Ajuste los topes positivos de 90 y 45 grados.
La guu'a de corte a Io 1. Montaje incorrecto de la guia de corte a Io largo. 1. Ver "Alinearniento de Guia" en Operaciones y Ajustes.
largo no se rnueve de 2. Rieles sucios o pegajosos. 2. Lirnpie y aplique cera en pasta a los rieles.
manera uniforme:
Vibraei6n excesiva de la 1. Hoja alabeada, 1. Reponga la hoja,

sierra: 2. Correa de marcha da5ada, 2. Reponga la correa de rnarcha.
3. Superficie de trabajo desigual. 3. Reposicione la sierra en una superficie plana. Ajuste los pies
niveladores, si fueron surninistrados con la sierra.
4. Apriete toda la ferreteria
4. La sierra no esta rnontada de manera segura.
89
,_ NOTAS ,_
90
91
Your Home
For repair - in your home - of all major brand appliances,
......................................
lawn and garden equipment, or heating and cooling systems, ....................
no matter who made it, no matter who sold it!
For the replacement parts, accessories and

owner's manuals that you need to do-it-yourself.
For Sears professional installation of home appliances

and items like garage door openers and water heaters.
1-800-4-MY-HOIVlE ® Anytime, day or night

(1-800-469-4663) (U.S.A. and Canada)
www.sears.com www.sears.ca
0 ur Home
Forrepair
ofcarry-in
products
likevacuums,
lawnequipment,
and electronics, call or go on-line for the location of the nearest
SearsParts8,Repair
Center.
1-800-488-1222 Anytime, day or night (U.S.A. only)
www.sears.com
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
TO purchase a protection agreement (U.S.A.)

or maintenance agreement (Canada)on a product serviced by Sears:
1-800-827-6655 (U.S.A.) 1-800-361-6665 (Canada)
Para pedir servicio de reparacion a Au Canada pour service en frangais:

.....................
domicilio, y para ordenar piezas: 1-800-LE-FOYER Mc
(1-800-533-6937)
1-888-SU-HOGAR sM www.sears.ca
© Sears, Roebuck and Co.
@ Registered Trademark / TMTrademark / sMService Mark of Sears, Roebuck and Co.

® Marca Registrada / TMMarca de F_brica / sMMarca de Servicio de Sears, Roebuck and Co.
MC Marque de commerce / MDMarque d_pos_e de Sears, Roebuck and Co. @ Sears, Roebuck and Co.
Owner's Manual
CRRFr MRH
1.5 Horsepower (continuous duty)
2 Horsepower (maximum developed)
3450 R.P.M. (no load R.P.M.)
10-in. LE SAW
Model No.
152.221140
CAUTION: Customer Helpline

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY; Read
and follow all of the Safety and
1-800-897-7709
Operating Instructions before Please have your Model No.
Operating this Table Saw. and Serial No. available.

Part No. OR91551
Revision: D Espa5ol pg. 49
SECTION PAGE
Warranty .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Product Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 2
Glossary of Terms .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Safety instructions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
Guidelines for Extension Cords ................................................................................................................................... 5
Grounding instructions ................................................................................................................................................. 6
Specific Safety instructions for Table Saw .................................................................................................................. 7
Accessories and Attachments ...................................................................................................................................... 9
Carton Contents ........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Know Your Table Saw .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Assembly instructions ................................................................................................................................................. 15
Operations and Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 25
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 41
Part List ......................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Espanol ......................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Service information ...................................................................................................................................................... 92
FULL ONE YEAR WARRANTY
If this product fails due to a defect in material or workmanship within one year from the date of purchase, return it
to the nearest Sears Service Center for repair, free of charge.
If this product is used for commercial or rental purposes, this warranty applies only for 90 days from date of purchase.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary, from state to state.
Sears, Roebuck and Co., Dept 817 WA, Hoffman Estates, IL 60179
lO-in. Table Saw Max depth-of-cut at 90-degree 3-3/8-in.

Motor type Induction Max depth-of-cut at 45-degree 2-1/4-in.
Continuous duty HP 1.5 Max rip to the right of the blade 25-in.
Maximum developed HP 2 Max rip to the left of the blade 24-in.
Amps 15/7.5 Table in front of blade at max depth-of-cut 12-1/2-in.
Volts 120/240 Max dado width 13/16-in.
Hertz 60 Max dado blade diameter 8-in.
RPM 3450 R.P.M. (no load R.P.M.) Left and right table wing lO-in, Cast Iron
Blade tilt Left tilt Weight of table saw 350 Ibs.
Blade drive Poly-V Belt
Blade diameter 10-in.
Blade arbor 5/8-in.
To avoid electrical shock to yourself and damage to the
Number of teeth 40
Table Saw, use proper circuit protection. Do not expose
Blade speed 3450 R.P.M. to rain, or use in a damp environment.
Fence type Front locking, Extruded
aluminum Fence and Rails The Table Saw is factory wired for 120V, 60 Hz, opera-
tion. Connect to a 120V, 15 amp branch circuit and use
a 15 amp time delay fuse or circuit breaker. The electri-
cal circuit cannot have any wire size less than #14. To
avoid shock or fire, replace power cord immediately if it
is damaged in any way.
Anti-KickbackFingers- Asafetydeviceattachedtothe Kerf- Thematerialremovedbythebladeinthework-
bladeguardandsplitterassembly
designed tostopa pieceduringanycuttingoperation.
workpiecefrombeingthrownbackduringa cuttingopera-
tion.
Kickback- Whentheworkpiece is thrownbacktowards
theoperator duringa cuttingoperation whentheworkpiece
Arbor- Theshaftonwhichthebladeor accessory
cut- initiallycontactsthebladeorif theworkpiece pinches
the
ting-toolis mounted. blade.Kickback isdangerous andcanresultinserious
injury.
BevelCut- Theoperationofmakinganycutwiththe
bladesetona degreeotherthan90degrees. MiterCut- Theoperation
ofmakinga cutusingthemiter
gaugeatanyangleotherthanzerodegrees.
CompoundCut- Theoperation
ofmakingbotha bevel
anda mitercutatonetime. PushStick- Anaccessorydevicethatcanbemadeor
purchasedtohelppushtheworkpiecethroughtheblade.
Apushstickis usedtokeeptheoperator's
handsaway
Crosscut- Theoperationofmakinga cutacrossthe fromthebladewhenrippinga narrowworkpiece.
grainorwidthofa workpiece.
Rabbet- Asquarenotchintheedgeoftheworkpiece.
Dado- Anon-through cutthatproduces a squarenotch.
A dadoistypicallyfrom1/8-in.to 13/16-in.
wide.Adado
requires
a specialsetofblades,notincluded withthis Resaw- Theoperationofmakinga cuttoreducethe
tablesaw. thickness
oftheworkpiece.
Featherboard- Anaccessorydevicethatcanbemadeor RipCut- Theoperation

of makinga cutwiththegrainof
purchasedtohelpguideor holddowna workpiece
during theworkpiece.
cuttingoperations.
SawBladePath- Theareathatis directlyinlinewiththe

Freehand - Averydangerousoperationofmakinga cut blade,including
areaover,under,behindandinfrontofit.
withoutusingthefenceormitergaugeina cuttingopera-
tion. Freehandcutsmustneverbeperformedona Table
Saw. Setof the SawBlade- Thedistance thatthetipsofthe
sawbladeareangledoutwards fromthethicknessofthe
blade.Thesetofthesawbladeteethallowsfortheblade
Gum,Pitchor Resin- Asticky,sapbasedresidue
that bodytopasssafelythroughallcuts.
comesfromwoodproducts.
Table/WorkArea- Thetotalsurfaceofthetopofthetable
Heel- Themisalignment
ofthebladetothemiterslots; sawonwhichtheworkpiece restswhileset-upor cutting
whenthebladeis notparalleltothemiterslots.
operations
arebeingperformed.
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 9. ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION. Any power
Operating a Table Saw can be dangerous if safety and tool can throw debris into the eyes during opera-
common sense are ignored. The operator must be tions, which could cause severe and permanent
familiar with the operation of the tool. Read this manual eye damage. Everyday eyeglasses are NOT safety
to understand this Table Saw. DO NOT operate this glasses. ALWAYS wear Safety Goggles (that com-
Table Saw if you do not fully understand the limitations ply with ANSI standard Z87.t ) when operating
of this tool. DO NOT modify this Table Saw in any way. power tools. Safety Goggles are available at Sears
REMEMBER: Your personal safety is your Retail Stores. Hearing equipment should comply
responsibility. with ANSi S3.t 9 Standards.
BEFORE USING THE TABLE SAW
To avoid serious injury and damage to the tool, read

and follow all of the Safety and Operating Instructions 10. ALWAYS UNPLUG THE TOOL FROM THE ELEC=
TRICAL RECEPTACLE when making adjustments,
changing parts or performing any maintenance.
1. READ the entire Owner's Manual. LEARN how to
use the tool for its intended applications. 11. KEEP PROTECTIVE GUARDS IN PLACE AND IN
WORKING ORDER.
2. GROUND ALL TOOLS. If the tool is supplied with
a 3-prong plug, it must be plugged into a 3-contact 12. AVOID ACCIDENTAL STARTING. Make sure that
electrical receptacle. The 3rd prong is used to
the power switch is in the "OFF" position before plug-
ground the tool and provide protection against ging in the power cord to the electrical receptacle.
accidental electric shock. DO NOT remove the 3rd
prong. See Grounding Instructions. 13. REMOVE ALL MAINTENANCE TOOLS from the
immediate area prior to turning the tool "ON".
3. AVOID A DANGEROUS WORKING ENVIRON=
MENT. DO NOT Use electrical tools in a damp 14. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
environment or expose them to rain. Use of incorrect or improper accessories could
cause serious injury to the operator and cause
4. DO NOT use electrical tools in the presence of
damage to the tool. If in doubt, check the instruction
flammable liquids or gasses.
manual that comes with that particular accessory.
5. ALWAYS keep the work area clean, well lit, and 15. NEVER LEAVE A RUNNING TOOL UNATTENDED.
organized. DO NOT work in an environment with Turn the power switch to the "OFF" position. DO
floor surfaces that are slippery from debris, grease,
NOT leave the tool until it has come to a complete
and wax.
stop.
6. KEEP ViSiTORS AND CHILDREN AWAY from the
16. DO NOT STAND ON A TOOL. Serious injury could
table saw. DO NOT permit people to be in the
result if the tool tips over or you accidentally contact
immediate work area, especially when the electrical the tool.
tool is operating.
17. DO NOT store anything above or near the tool
7. DO NOT FORCE THE TOOL to perform an opera-
where anyone might try to stand on the tool to
tion for which it was not designed. It will do a safer reach it.
and higher quality job by only performing operations
for which the tool was intended.
18. MAINTAIN YOUR BALANCE. DO NOT extend
yourself over the tool. Wear oil resistant rubber-
8. WEAR PROPER CLOTHING. DO NOT wear loose
soled shoes. Keep floor clear of debris, grease, and
clothing, gloves, neckties, or jewelry. These items wax.
can get caught in the machine during operations
and pull the operator into the moving parts. Users 19. MAINTAIN TOOLS WITH CARE. Always keep tools
must wear a protective cover on their hair, if the clean and in good working order. Keep all blades
hair is long, to prevent it from contacting any
and tool bits sharp.
moving parts.
20. EACHAND EVERY TIME, CHECK FOR DAM= GUIDELINES FOR
AGED PARTS PRIOR TO USING THE TOOL.
EXTENSION CORDS
Carefully check all guards to see that they operate
properly, are not damaged, and perform their
The smaller the gauge-number, the larger diameter of
intended functions. Check for alignment, binding or
the extension cord. If in doubt of the proper size of an
breaking of moving parts. A guard or other part that
extension cord, use a shorter and thicker cord. An
is damaged should be immediately repaired or
undersized cord will cause a drop in line voltage result-
replaced.
ing in a loss of power and overheating. USE ONLY A
3-WIRE EXTENSION CORD THAT HAS A 3-PRONG
21. CHILDPROOF THE WORKSHOP AREA by remov- GROUNDING PLUG AND A 3-POLE RECEPTACLE
ing switch keys, unplugging tools from the electrical THAT ACCEPTS THE TOOL'S PLUG.
receptacles, and using padlocks.
22. DO NOT OPERATE TOOL iF UNDER THE If you are using an extension cord outdoors, be sure it
is marked with the suffix "W-A" ("W" in Canada) to indi-
iNFLUENCE OF DRUGS OR ALCOHOL.
cate that it is acceptable for outdoor use.
23. SECURE ALL WORK. When it is possible, use

Be sure your extension cord is properly sized, and in
clamps or jigs to secure the workpiece. This is safer
good electrical condition. Always replace a damaged
than attempting to hold the workpiece with your
hands. extension cord or have it repaired by a qualified person
before using it.
24. STAY ALERT, WATCH WHAT YOU ARE DOING,

AND USE COMMON SENSE WHEN OPERATING Protect your extension cords from sharp objects, exces-
sive heat, and damp or wet areas.
A POWER TOOL. DO NOT USE A TOOL WHILE
TIRED OR UNDER THE iNFLUENCE OF DRUGS,
ALCOHOL, OR MEDICATION. A moment of
inattention while operating power tools may result
in serious personal injury. 120 VOLT OPERATION ONLY
25' LONG 50' LONG 100' LONG
25. Use of this tool can generate and disburse dust or 0 to 6 Amps 18 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG
other airborne particles, including wood dust,
crystalline silica dust and asbestos dust. Direct
particles away from face and body. Always operate 10 to 12 Amps 16 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG
tool in well ventilated area and provide for proper 14 AWG 12 AWG Not
12 to 15 Amps
dust removal. Use dust collection system wherever Recommended
possible. Exposure to the dust may cause serious
and permanent respiratory or other injury, including
silicosis (a serious lung disease), cancer, and
death. Avoid breathing the dust, and avoid pro-
longed contact with dust. Allowing dust to get into
your mouth or eyes, or lay on your skin may pro- 240 VOLT OPERATION ONLY
mote absorption of harmful material. Always use
properly fitting NIOSH/OSHA approved respiratory 25' LONG 50' LONG 100' LONG
protection appropriate for the dust exposure, and
wash exposed areas with soap and water. 0 to 6 Amps 18 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG

26. USE A PROPER EXTENSION CORD iN GOOD
CONDiTiON. When using an extension cord, be
sure to use one heavy enough to carry the current 12 to 15 Amps 14 AWG 12 AWG Not
your product will draw. Please see "MiNiMUM Recommended
RECOMMENDED GAUGE FOR EXTENSION
CORDS (AWG)" table for correct sizing of an
extension cord. If in doubt, use the next heavier
gauge.
27. DiRECTiON OF FEED. Feed work into a blade or

cutter against the direction of rotation of the blade
or cutter only.
THIS TOOL MUST BE GROUNDED WHILE IN USE USE ONLY A 3-WIRE EXTENSION CORD THAT HAS
TO PROTECT THE OPERATOR FROM ELECTRIC A 3-PRONG GROUNDING PLUG AND A 3-POLE
SHOCK. RECEPTACLE THAT ACCEPTS THE TOOL'S PLUG.
IN THE EVENT OF A MALFUNCTION OR BREAK- REPLACE A DAMAGED OR WORN CORD IMMEDI-

DOWN, grounding provides the path of least resistance ATELY.
for electric current and reduces the risk of electric
shock. This tool is equipped with an electric cord that FOR GROUNDED, CORD=CONNECTED MACHINES
has an equipment-grounding conductor and a ground- iNTENDED FOR USE ON A SUPPLY CiRCUiT HAVING
ing plug. The plug MUST be plugged into a matching A NOMINAL RATING LESS THAN 150 VOLTS.
electrical receptacle that is properly installed and
grounded in accordance with ALL local codes and This tool is intended for use on a circuit that has an
ordinances. electrical receptacle as shown in FIGURE "IA'.
FIGURE "IA" shows a 3-wire electrical plug and elec-
DO NOT MODIFY THE PLUG PROVIDED. If it will not trical receptacle that has a grounding conductor. If a
fit the electrical receptacle, have the proper electrical properly grounded electrical receptacle is not available,
receptacle installed by a qualified electrician. an adapter as shown in FIGURE "IB" can be used to
temporarily connect this plug to a 2-contact ungrounded
IMPROPER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION of the equip- receptacle. The adapter has a rigid lug extending from it
ment-grounding conductor can result in risk of electric that MUST be connected to a permanent earth ground,
shock. The conductor with the green insulation (with such as a properly grounded receptacle box. THIS
or without yellow stripes) is the equipment-grounding ADAPTER IS PROHiBiTED iN CANADA.
conductor. DO NOT connect the equipment-grounding
conductor to a live terminal if repair or replacement of CAUTION: In all cases, make certain the electrical
the electric cord or plug is necessary. receptacle in question is properly grounded. If you are
not sure have a certified electrician check the electrical
CHECK with a qualified electrician or service personnel receptacle.
if you do not completely understand the grounding
instructions, or if you are not sure the tool is properly The motor supplied with your Table Saw is a dual volt-
grounded. age, 120/240 volt, single phase motor. If it is desired to
operate your table saw at 240 volts, it is necessary to
The motor supplied with your Table Saw is a dual reconnect the motor leads in the motor junction box by
voltage 120/240 volts, 60 hertz alternating current, following the wiring diagram on the junction box cover.
single phase motor. It is shipped wired for 120 volts
application. Never connect the green or ground wire
to a live terminal.
MAKE CERTAIN the motor is disconnected from power
source before reconnecting motor leads.
Fig. 1A Fig. 1B
grounding
120 Volt 120 Volt
adapter lug _
grounding conductor
grounding conductor
0
"'_ 3-p rong
electrical
receptacle
2-prong
3-wire electrical cord electrical
3-wire electrical cord receptacle
It is also necessary to replace the 120 volt plug, sup- MAKE CERTAIN that masks or respirators are
plied with the motor, with a UL/CSA Listed plug suitable MSHA/NIOSH approvedl.
for 240 volts and rated current of the saw. Contact a
The operation of any Table Saw can result in debris
local qualified electrician for proper procedures to install
being thrown into your eyes, which can result in severe
the plug. The table saw must comply with all local and
eye damage. ALWAYS wear Safety Goggles (that com-
national electrical codes after the 240 volt plug is
installed. ply with ANSi standard Z87.1) when operating the Table
Saw. Safety Goggles are available at Sears Retail
The table saw with a 240 volt plug should only be con- Stores. Keep your thumbs and fingers away from the
nected to an outlet having the same configuration as blade while it is spinning.
the plug shown in Figure "1C'. No adapter is available
or should be used with the 240 volt plug.
Fig. 1 C grounded outlet box

current Basic precautions should always be followed when
240 VOLT carrying
using your Table Saw. To reduce the risk of injury,
©
prongs
electrical shock or fire, comply with the safety rules
listed below:
1. READ and understand the instruction manual

grounding blade is
longest of the 3 blades
© 2.
3.
DO NOT OPERATE THiS MACHINE
OBTAIN ADVICE FROM YOUR SUPERVISOR,

until it is
assembled and installed according to the instructions.
instructor, or another qualified person if you are not

familiar with the operation of this machine.
4. DO NOT leave the Table Saw plugged into the elec-

trical outlet. Unplug Table Saw from the outlet when
MAKE CERTAIN the receptacle in question is properly not in use and before servicing, changing blades
grounded. If you are not sure have a qualified electri- and cleaning.
cian check the receptacle.
5. ALWAYS turn the power switch "OFF" before
unplugging the Table Saw.
6. TO REDUCE THE RiSK OF ELECTRICAL
This Table Saw is for indoor use only. Do not expose to
SHOCK, do not use outdoors. Do not expose to
rain or use in damp locations.
rain. Store indoors.
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7. FOLLOW all electrical and safety codes, including
FOR TABLE SAWS the National Electric Code (NEC) and the
Occupational Safety and Health Regulations
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 (OSHA). All electrical connections and wiring should
be made by qualified personnel only.
8. DO NOT handle the plug or Table Saw with wet

hands.
SOME DUST CREATED BY POWER SANDING,
SAWING, GRINDING, DRILLING AND OTHER CON= 9. USE only as described in this manual. USE acces-
STRUCTION ACTIVITIES contains chemicals known to sories only recommended by Sears.
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Some examples of these chemicals are: 10. DO NOT pull the Table Saw by the power cord.
NEVER allow the power cord to come in contact
• lead from lead-based paints, with sharp edges, hot surfaces, oil or grease.
• crystalline silica from bricks and cement and other
masonry products, and 11. DO NOT unplug the Table Saw by pulling on the
power cord. ALWAYS grasp the plug, not the cord.
• arsenic and chromium from chemically-treated lumber.
Your risk from these exposures varies, depending on 12. REPLACE a damaged cord immediately. DO NOT
how often you do this type of work. To reduce your use a damaged cord or plug. If the Table Saw is not
exposure to these chemicals: work in a well ventilated operating properly, or has been damaged, left out-
doors or has been in contact with water, return it to
area, and work with approved safety equipment, such
a Sears Service Center.
as those dust masks that are specially designed to filter
out microscopic particles. 13 DO NOT use the Table Saw as a toy. DO NOT use
near or around children.
14. TheTableSawis designedforhomeuseor light 27. NEVERperformlayout,assemblyorset-upworkon
commercial
dutyONLY. thetable/work
areawhenthemachineis running.
15. CONNECT TableSawtoa properlygroundedoutlet 28. NEVER reset the thermal-overload button before
only.Seegroundinginstructions. you have turned the table saw "OFF".
16. ALWAYSUSEtheguardswhenever possible. 29. PROPERLY SUPPORT long or wide workpiece.
Checktoseethattheyarein place,securedand
30. TURN THE SAW "OFF"
workingcorrectly. and unplug from power
source. Clean off the table/work area before leav-
17. AVOIDKICKBACKby: ing the saw. LOCK the START/STOP switch with
" Keepingbladesharpandfreeof rustandpitch. padlock provided to prevent unauthorized use.
,, Keepingripfenceparallelto sawblade. 31. ALWAYS position auxiliary fence at least 2-inches
,, Using saw blade guard and splitter assembly for
in front of saw blade when using auxiliary fence as
every possible operation, including all through-
a stop when cross cutting.
sawing.
,, Pushing the workpiece past the saw blade prior to 32. The right extension wing MUST BE completely
release. assembled and motor cover closed and fastened
• Never rip a workpiece that is twisted or before table saw is to be connected to the power
warped, or does not have a straight edge to guide source.
along the fence.
33. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION regarding the safe
• Using featherboards when the blade guard and
splitter assembly cannot be used. and proper operation of this product is available
from the National Safety Council, 1121 Spring Lake
,, Never sawing a large workpiece that cannot be
controlled. Drive, Itasca, IL 60143-3201 in the Accident
Prevention Manual for Industrial Operation and also
,, Never using the fence as a guide when cross-
in the Safety Data Sheets provided by the NSC.
cutting.
Please also refer to the American National
• Never sawing a workpiece with loose knots or
Standards Institute ANSI 01.1 Safety Requirements
other flaws.
for Woodworking Machinery and the U.S.
18. REMOVE cut-off pieces and debris from the table Department of Labor OSHA 1910.213 Regulations.
before starting the saw. The vibration of the saw 34. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Refer to them
may cause them to move into the saw blade and be
frequently and use them to instruct other users.
thrown out. After cutting, turn the saw off. When
the blade has come to a complete stop, unplug the
saw and remove all debris. information regarding the safe and proper operation of
this tool is available from the following sources:
19. NEVER START the saw with the workpiece against
the blade.
Power Tool Institute
20. NEVER perform "free-hand" operations. Use either 1300 Summer Avenue
the fence or miter gauge to position and guide the Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
workpiece. Hold the workpiece firmly against the www.powertoolinstitute.org
miter gauge or fence.
National Safety Council
21. USE a push stick(s) for ripping a narrow workpiece. 1121 Spring Lake Drive
22. AVOID AWKWARD OPERATIONS AND HAND Itasca, IL 60143-3201
POSiTiONS where a sudden slip could cause a
American National Standards institute
hand to move into the blade.
25 West 43rd Street
23. KEEP arms, hands and fingers away from the blade. 4th floor
New York, NY 10036
24. NEVER have any part of your body in line with the www.ansi.org
path of the saw blade.
25. NEVER reach around or over the blade. ANSi 01.1 Safety Requirements for Woodworking\
Machines, and the U.S. Department of Labor regulations
26. NEVER attempt to free a stalled blade without first www.osha.gov
turning the machine "OFF" and unplugging it from
the power source.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES Sears may recommend other accessories not listed in
this manual.
Visit your Sears Hardware Department or see the Sears
Power and Hand Tool Catalog for the following acces-
sories. See your nearest Sears Hardware Department or Sears
Power and Hand Tool Catalog for other accessories.
ITEM STOCK NUMBER
* Auxiliary Fence, Rip Fence 29878 Do not use any accessory unless you have completely
* Miter Gauge Extension & Stop 29879 read the Owner's Manual for that accessory.
* Stock Clamp, Miter Gauge 29880

* Dust Chute with Dust Port 22102
* Micro-Adjustment Assembly 29881 Use only accessories recommended for this table saw.
* Table Insert - Standard 29882 Using other accessories may cause serious injury and
cause damage to the table saw.
* Table Insert - Dado 29885
* Table Insert - Molding Cutterhead 29887
* Saw Blade - Leitz, 10-in. x 40 tooth 29888
variable pitch blade
* Fence Guide System 32371
CONSTRUCTING A FEATHERBOARD
Fig. 2A
24"
5"
Figure 2A illustrates dimensions for making a typical Fig. 2B

featherboard. The material, which the featherboard is
constructed of, should be straight piece of wood that is
free of knots and cracks. Featherboards are used to
keep the work in contact with the fence and table and
help prevent kickbacks. Clamp the featherboard to the
fence and table so that the leading edge of the feather-
board will support the workpiece until the cut is com-
pleted.
Use featherboards for all non-through cutting opera-

tions where the guard and splitter assembly must be
removed. Always replace the guard and splitter
assembly when the non-through cutting operations
are finished. See figure 2B.
CONSTRUCTING A PUSHSTICK
When ripping work less than 4 inches wide, a pushstick should be used to complete the feed and could easily be
made from scrap material by following the pattern shown in figure 2C.
Fig. 2C
The Pushstick should be made of 3/4 or 1/2 inch wood or a thickness less than the width of the
workpiece to be cut.
Figure 2C should be copied and scaled so the grids are 1/2 inch square. This copy can be used
to make your pushstick.
10
UNPACKING AND CHECKING CONTENTS Fig. 3=1
The table saw is a heavy machine, two people are

required to unpack and lift the table saw.
This table saw will require some amount of assembly.
The table saw and fence is shipped in one carton. This
carton also contains a box of saw parts.
1. Remove parts from all of the cartons and lay them
on a clean work surface.
2. Two or more people are required to lift the table
saw off of the shipping pallet.
3. Remove any protective materials and coatings from
all of the parts and the table saw. The protective
coatings can be removed by spraying WD-40 on \
them and wiping it off with a soft cloth. This may \
o
need redone several times before all of the protec- \ \
o
tive coatings are removed completely.
CAUTION: DO NOT use acetone, gasoline or lacquer thin-
ner to remove any protective coatings on your table saw.
4. After cleaning, apply a good quality paste wax to 2
any unpainted surfaces. Make sure to buff out the 12
wax before assembly.
\
5. Compare the items to figures below; verify that all \
\
\
\
items are accounted for before discarding the ship- \
\
\
ping box. If there are any missing parts, call \
\
\
Customer Helpline 1-800-897-7709.
\
\
\
11 \
\
\

bled and motor cover closed and fastened before table
saw is to be connected to the power source.
10
If any parts are missing, do not attempt to plug in the
power cord and turn "ON" the table saw. The table saw
can only be turned "ON" after all the parts have been
obtained and installed correctly.
TABLE SAW
1. Table saw assembly
2. Extension wing, cast iron (2)
3. Handwheel (2)
4. Handwheel lock knob (2) 14
5. Splitter mounting rod
6. Splitter bracket assembly
15
7. Wrench hook
9. Fence hook (2)
10. Polly-V belt
11. Blade guard and splitter assembly
12. Dust Port
13. Leg assembly (2)
14. Tie bar (2)
15. Dust Chute
16. Switch
17. Saw blade (not shown)
11
Fig. 3=2
21
2O 23 24
FENCE 22
20. Auxiliary fence
21. Rip fence assembly
22. Fence front rail, right
23. Fence front rail, left
24. Fence rear rail (2)
25. Clamp knob with special nut (2)
26. Micro-Adjust assembly
27. Fence rear rail connector 27
28. Front rail end cap, right
29. Front rail end cap, left
30. Fence front rail alignment

25 28 29
bar (2) 3O
Fig. 3=3
41
MITER GAUGE
40. Miter gauge
41. Cross cut fence
42. Depth stop
43. Clamp assembly
44. M5 x 20mm Hex socket head

screw (3)
45. M5 Flat washer (3)
46. M5 Square nut (3)
47. Elevating rod
48. Knob (2)
12
Fig. 3-4
GB
GX GAD _W _'_ x t_'_
@
Gx SDC_T GAB _RE W _ x
@
_ci_ rL^l ¥_r
@ Ore, @
©I ©I
RInD GAD _Lr-W_ _W _ x
@ 0===_ @
_D GAD _Lr-l._ _I w _ _ 1_',_ L_ _f_ _ LDL__e _i_"
Hardware packs are not identified or labeled. See hardware

diagram to help in finding the correct part. See figure 3-4.
• Hardware Pack for Extension Wings (#0R92013)

includes: Hardware Pack for Cabinet Legs and Dust Chute
Flat Washer M8 (8) (#0R92019) includes:
Lock Washer M8 (8) Flat Washer M8 (16)
Hex Head Screw M8x1.25 x 30mm (8) Flat Washer 5/16" (8)
Lock Washer M8 (12)
• Hardware Pack for Rear Rail (#0R92016) includes: Lock Washer 5/16" (8)
Flat Washer M8 (8) Hex Head Screw M8x1.25 x 25ram (12)
Lock Washer M8 (6) Carriage Head Screw 5/16-18 x 5/8" (8)
Button Head Cap Screw M8x1.25 x 25mm (4) Hex Nut M8 (8)
Button Head Cap Screw M8x1.25 x 35mm (2) Hex Nut 5/16" (8)
Hex Nut M8 (2)
Hardware for ON/OFF Switch: (Hardware finish is
* Hardware Pack for Front Rail (#0R92017) Black Oxide)
includes: Hex Head Screw M6 x 12mm (2)
Flat Washer M8 (4) Square Nut M6 (2)
Lock Washer M8 (4)
Square Head Screw M8x1.25 x 35mm (4) * Miscellaneous Hardware:
Hex Nut M8 (4) Sheet Metal Screw M4 x 8mm (6)
Sheet Metal Screw M4 x 16mm (4)
13
1
27 2
26 5 4
8
3 9
6 7 11
10
12
25
23
13
22
21 17
2O B
1. Splitter assembly 10. Rear rail 19. Rubber foot
2. Blade guard 11. Auxiliary fence 20. Blade height handwheel

3. Anti-kickback fingers 12. Front rail with scale 21. Handwheel lock knob
4. Blade 13. Micro Adjustment knob 22. Fence hook
5. Align-a-cut insert 14. Rip fence lock handle 23. Bevel handwheel
6. Table surface 15. Motor cover 24. Bevel handwheel lock knob
7. lO-in, cast iron wing 16. Bevel scale 25. On/Off switch
8. Rear fence hold down (not shown) 17.3/4 Cabinet 26. Deluxe Miter gauge
9. Rip fence 18. Cabinet leg 27. Miter gauge groove
14
TOOLS REQUIRED 3, Attach two tie bars (F) inside and between front and
The following tools are needed for assembly and align- rear legs already attached to the cabinet with (G)
ment. Note: Two blade wrenches and five hex wrenches eight 5/16-18 x 5/8" carriage head screws, 5/16" flat
are provided with your table saw. The remaining tools washers, 5/16" lock washers and 5/16-18 hex nuts
are typical shop tools and are not included with your and securely tighten all hardware. See figure 4-1.
table saw.
18mm wrench 8mm wrench DUST CHUTE ASSEMBLY
13mm wrench 3/16-in. hex wrench
10mm wrench #2 Phillips screwdriver
Figure 5=1
D
• The table saw is a heavy machine; two people are A

required for certain assembly operations.
the tool is unplugged.
the power switch is in the "OFF" position.
• For your own safety, DO NOT connect the machine to
the power source until the machine is completely
assembled and you read and understand the entire
Owner's Manual.
CABINET LEG ASSEMBLY

B
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from C

the power source.
1. Turn the table saw upside down onto its cast iron 1. Attach the dust chute assembly (A) to the bottom of
table. CAUTION: The table saw is heavy; two peo- the table saw cabinet, making sure the opening (B)
ple are required for this operation. Be sure to lay in the dust chute is to the rear of the table saw (C).
cardboard on the floor to protect the table surface. Use (D) four M8 x 25mm hex head screws and M8
lock washers and tighten all hardware. See figure 5-1.
Figure 4=1 2.. Turn the table saw right side up. CAUTION: The
A table saw is heavy; two people are required for this
operation.
E
F A Figure 5=2
2, Attach leg assemblies (A) to the front (B) and rear (C)
of the table saw cabinet by placing (D) eight M8 x _E
25ram hex head screws and eight M8 flat washers
down through the mounting holes in the leg assembly
and cabinet (E). Place an M8 flat washer, M8 lock
washer and M8 hex nut onto each of the eight screws 3. Attach the dust port (E) to the dust chute (F) with
attaching leg assembly to cabinet. Do not completely four 1/4-20 x 3/8" round head tap screws.
tighten hardware at this time. See figure 4-1. See figure 5-2.
15
POLY=V BELT ASSEMBLY 1. CAUTION: The extension wings are heavy; two
people are required to assemble both extension
wings to the table saw.
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from 2. Assemble one of the extension wings (A) to the left
the power source. side of the table saw. Align the four holes (B) in the
Figure 64 extension wing with the four holes in the left side of
the saw table. Use four M8 x 30mm hex head
J
A screws, M8 lock washers and M8 flat washers. Do

not completely tighten hardware at this time. See
figure 7-1.
Figure 7=2
D
E
- c
/4
1. Make sure all packaging material has been

removed from inside the cabinet.
2. Open the motor cover and place the motor Poly-V
belt (A) over the blade pulley (B). See figure 6-1.
3. Carefully lift the motor (C) and place the belt under
the motor pulley (not shown). Make sure all the 3. Lay a straight edge (C) across the saw table (D)
v-notches in the belt are mated with the v-notches and extension wing (E). Make sure that the front
of the blade and motor pulley. See figure 6-1. face of the extension wing (F) is flat to the front
4. Carefully let the motor down and close motor cover. face of the saw table (G). Adjust the extension
wing so that its top surface is exactly flat to the saw
EXTENSION WING ASSEMBLY
table and securely tighten hardware. See figure 7-2.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to assemble the other

MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from extension wing to the right side of the table saw.
the power source.
HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY

bled and motor cover closed and fastened before table MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from
saw is to be connected to the power source. the power source.
Figure 74 Figure 8-1

A
D
C
16
Placeoneofthehandwheels (A)ontotheshaft(B) 1. Assemble both of the fence hooks (A) to the left
ofthebevelshaftlocatedonthesideofthecabinet. side of the cabinet (B) using four M4 x 8mm sheet
Alignthegroove(C)in thebackofthehandwhee[ metal screw, not shown. See figure 9-1.
withthepin(D)throughtheshaft. Seefigure8-1. 2. Assemble the wrench hook (C) above the fence
hooks using two M4 x 8mm sheet metal screws, not
Figure 8=2
shown. See figure 10-1.
E BLADE GUARD AND SPLITTER ASSEMBLY

the power source.
1. Loosen table insert retainer bolt and remove tame
insert.
Figure 10=1
B
2. Thread the locking knob (E) onto the end of the
threaded shaft (F). See figure 8-2.
3. Repeat the steps above to assemble the hand-

wheel and locking knob onto the blade raise/lower
shaft located on the front of the cabinet.
WRENCH AND FENCE HOOK ASSEMBLY
2. Place the threaded end of the mounting splitter rod

(A) through the hole (B) in the rear of the cabinet.
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from Place a M12 hex nut (not shown) onto the threaded
the power source. end of the mounting splitter rod inside of the cabi-
net and tighten securely. See figure 10-1 and 10-2.
Figure 94
Note: Place an 18mm wrench on 12mm hex nut and a
13mm wrench on flats of the splitter rod and tighten.
Figure 10=2
C
/
A
3. Place the splitter bracket assembly (C) onto the

mounting splitter rod. See figure 10-2 and 10-3.
17
0
H
\ Q
4, Place the front attachment point (D) of the blade 7, Place a square (N) onto the saw table and against
guard and splitter assembly (H) down into the tool- the splitter assembly (0) behind the kickback
less front attachment point (E) and the rear attach- fingers (P). Make adjustments to the splitter
ment slot (F) onto the threads of the splitter bracket bracket assembly (Q) so that the splitter is square
knob (G); securely tighten splitter bracket knob. to the saw table and tighten the two hex socket
Note: The splitter bracket assembly will need to be head screws on the bottom of the splitter bracket
positioned to fit the blade guard and splitter assem- assembly. See figure 10-5.
bly on the mounting splitter rod. See figure 10-3.
5, Remove the hex nut (K) and outer flange (J) from Figure 10=6
the blade arbor (I). Note: The arbor has a right hand
thread; to loosen the hex nut, turn it counterclock-
wise. See figure 10-4.
U
Figure 10=4
8. Lay a straight edge (R) against the left side of the

saw blade (S). Align the splitter (T) so that it is in a
straight line with the blade and tighten the one hex
socket head screws (U) on top of the splitter brack-
et assembly. See figure 10-6.
9. Replace table insert and tighten table insert

6, Place 10" saw blade (H) onto blade arbor (I), make retaining-bolt removed in step 1.
sure the teeth of the blade are pointing down in the
front of the table saw. Place the outer flange (J) 10. If there is any problem with the front splitter attach-
and hex nut (K) onto the blade arbor and snug hex ment bracket being out-of-square to the saw table
nut by hand. Place the open-end blade wrench (L) or blade alignment, see "AMGNING SPMTTER
on the flats of the inner blade flange (not shown) BRACKET" in the Operations and Adjustments sec-
and the box-end blade wrench (M) onto the hex nut tion of this manual.
and securely tighten. Note: The blade arbor has a
right hand thread, to tighten the hex nut turn it
clockwise. See figure 10-4.
18
RiP FENCE ASSEMBLY 5. Slide the heads of four M8 x 35mm square head
screws (F), two from each end of the front rail into
the front rail. Note: The front rail is still positioned
upside down on the saw table. Position the screws
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from so that they will align with the two holes in the front
the power source. of the saw table and one hole in each extension
wing (G). See figure 11-2.
Figure 11-1
6. Place front rail against front of saw table with the
C four screws going through the four holes in the saw
C A table and extension wings. Place an one M8 flat
washer, M8 lock washer and M8 hex nut onto each
of the four screws on the back side of the saw table
and extension wings. Do not completely tighten the
"D four hex nuts at this point.
Figure 11=3
H
E
A
B
1. Alignment bars (B) have set screws (A) already

installed. Make sure set screws are flush with face
of alignment bar. See figure 11-1.
2. Place both fence front rails (C) on the saw table
upside down. Make certain that the right fence rail
is on the right-hand side and the left front rail is on
the left-hand side. Check that both scales on the
front rails have the 1-inch marking close to each
other. See figure 11-1.
3. Insert both alignment bars halfway into the back (D)

and bottom (E) square nut grooves in the right front
rail and slightly snug set screws to hold alignment
bar into the front rail. See figure 11-1.
4. Slide the left front rail onto alignment bars and

against other half of front rail. Make sure both
sections of the front rails are flat and straight to
each other. Slightly snug set screws in both align-
ment bars. Recheck that the front rail is flat and
straight, then securely tighten all set screws.
7, Raise saw blade (H) and place a straight edge (I)
Figure 11=2 against right side of saw blade extending out over
front of saw table. Align the edge of the right front
F
rail (J) with right side of saw blade using the
straight edge. See figure 11-3.
O
G
19
R
K
11. Slide the right side rear rail (T) onto rear rail con-
nector. Assemble the right rear rail with two M8 x
25mm button head cap screws to the saw table and
one M8 x 35mm button head cap screw, M8 flat
8. Using a combination square (K), make sure the washer, M8 lock washer and M8 hex nut to the
front rail (L) is level across the saw table and exten- extension wing. See figure 11-6.
sion wings, and then securely tighten the four hex
12. Using a combination square, make sure the rear rail
nuts. See figure 11-4.
is level to the saw table and extension wings and
below the bottom of the miter gauge slots, then
securely tighten all hardware. See figure 11-4.
Figure 11=5
Figure 11=7 Z
AC U
M Y
/
0 Q
W
V
9. Assemble the left side rear rail (M) to the left rear
side of the table saw (N). Attach rear rail (M) to
13. Assemble the two cursors (U) to the rip fence
table (N) with two M8 x 25mm button head cap
assembly (V) using four M5 x 16mm pan head
screws, M8 Iockwashers, and M8 flat washers (0).
screws and M5 lock washers (W). See figure 11-7.
Attach rear rail to extension wing with one M8 x
35mm button head cap screw, M8 flat washer, M8 14. Lift up on the rip fence handle (X) and place the
Iockwasher and M8 hex nut (P). Make sure that fence down onto the saw table with the fence body
the rear rail is below the bottom of the miter gauge into front rail. With the rip fence lock handle up, you
slots (R) in the saw table. See figure 11-5 and can slide the fence back and forth across the saw
11-6. table. Pushing the rip fence lock handle down will
lock the fence from moving. See figure 11-7.
10. Slide rear rail connector (S) into the left rear rail
15. Align left fence side (AB) at a distance from the
already assembled. See figure 11-5.
right side (AC) of the right miter gauge groove and
lock the fence. See figure 11-7.
20
17.Assemblethecursor(U)to the rightsideoffence AUXILIARY FENCE ASSEMBLY
andM5lockwashers(W).Donotcompletely tight-
enscrews.Seefigure11-7.
18.Aligncursorwiththescale(Z)sothatthethinblack ALWAYS position auxiliary fence at least 2-inches in
line(Y)is onthesamenumberasthedistance front of the saw blade when using auxiliary fence as a
stop when crosscutting.
measuredinstep16.Tightenthecursorscrews.
19.Removefencefromtableandreposition iton left Figure 13=1
sideof sawblade.Alignrightfencesideat a dis- D
tancefromthe leftsideof leftmitergaugegroove B
andlockthefence.
20.Usea measuring tapetomeasurethedistancefrom
thesawbladeleftsidetothe rightfenceside.
21.Assemblethesecondcursorto leftsideoffence A
andM6lockwashers.Donotcompletely tighten
screws.
22.Aligncursorwiththescaleso thatthethinblackline
is onthesamenumberasthedistancemeasured in
step20.Tightenthecursorscrews.
Figure 11=8
AA
1, To attach the auxiliary fence (A) to the main fence
assembly (B), thread two clamp knobs (C) through
the top of the auxiliary fence and into a special
1/4-20 square nut, not shown. See figure 13-1.
2, Slide the special square nuts into the top of the

fence (D). Slide auxiliary fence into position and
tighten clamp knobs.
3, For correct use, see "USING AUXILIARY FENCE

ON RIP FENCE" in the "OPERATION AND
23. Note: The rip fence comes with a rear hold-down
ADJUSTMENTS section.
(AA) built into the end of the fence, to keep the rear
of the fence from lifting while using a feather board.
To engage the rear hold-down, simply flip down on
the hold down arm so that it is under the rear rail,
as shown. See figure 11-8.
24. Check and make sure the rip fence is square to the
saw table and is parallel to the miter groove. If any
adjustments are needed see "FENCE ADJUST-
MENTS" in the Operation and Adjustments section
in this manual.
21
ON/OFF SWITCH AND 5. Place the left front rail end cap (A) into the end of
END CAP ASSEMBLY the front rail (B). Attach end cap to rail with two
M4 x 16mm pan head self-tapping screws (C).
See figure 14-2.
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from 6. Repeat step above to attach right side front rail
the power source. end cap.
CONNECTING SWITCH CORD

Figure 14=1 TO MOTOR CORD

the power source.
Figure 15-1
JJ
B
1. Place two M6 x 12mm hex head screws (A) up

through the two holes (B) in the switch support (C).
See figure 14-1.
A
2. Thread two M6 square nuts (D) onto M6 x 12mm hex
head screws about three turns. See figure 14-1. 1. Place the switch cord (A) through hole (B) in front
of cabinet. See figure 15-1.
3. Slide the M6 square nuts and switch assembly (E)
into the left end of the front rail (F). See figure 14-1. 2. Open motor cover, plug switch cord (C) into motor
cord (D). See figure 15-2.
4. Position the switch assembly to desired location
3 Pull slack in switch cord into the cabinet.
and tighten hardware. CAUTION: Keep switch out
of saw blade path. Most common switch location is
to the left side of the saw blade. Figure 15=2
Figure 14=2
3, Pull slack in switch cord into the cabinet.
4. Make a loop (E) from the slack of the switch cord

and place it behind cord retaining bar (F). See
figure 15-2.
22
MITER GAUGE ASSEMBLY Figure 16=2

the power source.
Figure 16=1
4. Slide both of the square nuts with hex socket head

cap screws and flat washer (F) into the lower T-slot
(G) of the cross cut fence (H). See figure 16-2.
5. Place the thread section of the hex socket head
A screws into the grooves (I) of the miter gauge body.
B Make sure the flat washers are against the heads
of the hex socket head cap screws. See figure 16-
Thread elevating rod (A) into the top threaded hole 2.
in the miter gauge body (B). See figure 16-1. 6. Position the cross cut fence so that no part of the
fence is in the path of the saw blade. Allow the
2. Place clamp assembly (C) on top of the miter cross cut fence to rest on the saw table and secure-
gauge knob (D) and elevating rod. Place two
knobs (E) through the slot in the clamp assembly
and thread one knob into the threaded hole in the
miter gauge knob and elevating rod. Position Figure 16=3
clamp assembly as shown and tighten both knobs.
See figure 16-1.

socket head cap screw. Thread one M5 square nut
onto the hex socket head cap screw until the screw
is flush with the back of the square nut. Repeat
this for one more flat washer, head socket head cap
screw and square nut.

socket head cap screw (J). Place this through the
hole in the top of the depth stop (K). Thread one
M5 square nut onto the hex socket head cap screw
until the tip of the screw is flush with the back of the
square nut. See figure 16-3.
8. Slide the square nut and depth stop into the top
T-slot (L) of the cross cut fence. See figure 16-3.
9. Position depth stop as desired and tighten the hex
socket head cap screw.
23
BOLTING TABLE SAW TO THE FLOOR

the power source.
If you wish, the table saw can be permanently mounted

to the floor. To attach to the floor, see instructions
below.
Figure 15A=1
Remove the four rubber footpads (A) from the table

saw legs (B). See Figure 15A-1.
2, Position the table saw where you want it perma-

nently mounted.
3, Mark the floor through the holes in the bottom of

legs.
4, Move the table saw out of the way and drill pilot
holes at the four locations marked.
5, Attach the table saw to the floor using appropriate

hardware (not included).
24
CAUTION LOCKING ON/OFF SWITCH
• A separate electrical circuit should be used for your 1. When the table saw is not in use, the "ON" button
table saw. The table saw comes pre-wired for 120-volt should be locked so that it cannot be started.
use. The circuit should not be less than #14 AWG wire
2. Using the padlock included with your table saw, lift
and should be protected with a 15-amp time lag fuse.
the "red "OFF" paddle and place the padlock
• Have a qualified electrician repair or replace damaged through the holes (C) in the side of the "ON" button
or worn cord immediately. and then lock the padlock. Make sure keys have
• Before connecting the motor to the power line, make been removed from padlock and placed where no
certain the switch is in the "OFF" position and be sure children can get them. See figure 17-1.
that the electric current is of the same characteristics 3. To use the table saw, unlock and remove the pad-
as the motor nameplate. All line connections should lock from the "ON" button.
make good contact.
• Running on low voltage or long extension cords will
damage the motor. THERMAL=OVERLOAD PROTECTION
• DO NOT expose the table saw to rain or operate the • Turn the power switch "OFF" and unplug the power
in damp locations. cord from its power source prior to doing or perform-
ing any maintenance.
• MAKE SURE all parts have been assembled correctly
Make certain that the OFF button has been de-
and are in working order.
pressed before pushing the thermal-overload-reset
• KEEP table surface clear of tools and debris before button.
starting table saw.
The motor supplied with your table saw has a resettable
STARTING AND STOPPING THE SAW thermal-overload relay (D), see figure 17-1. If the motor
shuts off during an operation (cutting a workpiece too
Figure 17=1 fast or using a dull blade, using the saw beyond its
capacity, or low voltage) press the OFF button, let the
motor cool three to five minutes. Push the reset ther-
Y mal-overload button on the side of the ON/OFF switch
assembly. Make certain that the saw blade and work
• C
area has been cleared of debris before restarting saw.
The motor can now be turned on again.
L ON
RAISING AND LOWERING THE BLADE
A
Figure 18=1
1. The ON/OFF switch is located under the front rail

on the table saw.
2. To turn the table saw on, press the green "ON"
button (A) in one-half inch. Note: There is a safety The blade height adjustment handwheel and handwheel
feature on the switch to insure that the switch must lock knob is located on the front of the cabinet above
be completely pressed before the saw will START. the blade bevel scale. To raise the saw blade, loosen
See figure 17-1. the handwheel lock knob (A) (counter-clockwise) and
3. To turn the table saw off, press the large red "OFF" turn the handwheel (B) clockwise. When the saw blade
paddle (B) or lift the paddle and press directly on is at its desired height, tighten the handwheel lock knob
the red "OFF" button. See figure 17-1. (clockwise) until it is securely tightened. See figure 18-1.
25
Tolowerthesawblade,loosenthehandwheel lock 3. If the blade will not tilt to 90-degree, turn (counter-
knob(counterclockwise) andturnthe handwheel clockwise) the set screw (C) in the left hand side of
counterclockwise. Whenthesawbladeisat itsdesired the saw table until the blade can be positioned to
height,tightenthehandwheel lockknob(clockwise) 90-degrees. Tighten bevel handwheel lock knob,
untilit issecurelytightened. located on the left side of the cabinet. This will keep
TILTING THE BLADE screw is contacting positive stop. See figure 19-1.
The blade bevel handwheel and handwheel lock knob
is located on the left side of the cabinet. To increase
the saw blade-bevel, loosen the handwheel lock knob
(A) (counterclockwise) and turn the handwheel (B)
clockwise. When the saw blade is at its desired tilting. Turn the set screw clockwise until it comes
in contact with the positive stop.
degree, tighten the handwheel lock knob (clockwise)
until it is securely tightened. See figure 18-1
To return the saw blade bevel to zero degrees, loosen Figure 19=2
the handwheel lock knob (counterclockwise) and turn
the handwheel counterclockwise. When the saw blade
is back to zero degrees it will come into contact with the
adjustable positive stop which will cause the blade to
stop. Tighten the handwheel lock knob (clockwise) until
it is securely tightened.
To tilt the blade bevel to 45-degrees, loosen the hand-

wheel lock knob (counterclockwise) and turn the hand-
wheel clockwise. When the saw blade is at 45-degrees
it will come into contact with the adjustable positive stop
which will cause the blade to stop, tighten the hand-
wheel lock knob (clockwise) until it is securely tightened.
ADJUSTING BLADE BEVEL

POSITIVE STOPS
Figure 19=1
5. To adjust blade 45-degree blade bevel positive stop,

A raise the saw blade to its highest position.
6. Using a combination square (D) check that the
blade is 45-degrees to the saw table (45-degrees
7. If the blade will not tilt to 45-degrees, turn (counter-
clockwise) the set screw (E) in the right hand side
of the saw table until the blade can be positioned to
45-degrees. Tighten bevel handwheel lock knob,
located on the left side of the cabinet. This will keep
screw is contacting positive stop. See figure 19-2.

tilting. Turn the set screw clockwise until it comes
1. To adjust blade 90-degree blade bevel positive stop, in contact with the positive stop.
raise the saw blade (A) to its highest position. See
figure 19-1.
BEVEL ARROW ADJUSTMENT
2. Using a combination square (B) check that the
1. Make certain that the blade is at 90-degrees to the
blade is 90-degrees to the saw table (zero degrees
table surface with a combination square. See
figure 19-1.
26
Fig. 20=1 1. Raise the saw blade to its highest point.
C 2. Place a combination square (A) on the saw table

with one edge (B) of the square against the left
\/ miter slot (C). See Figure 20A-1.
3. Adjust the square so the rule (D) just touches the
saw blade about 1 inch in from the outer diameter.
Make sure the rule is not touching any of the car-
bide tips of the saw blade.
4. Lock the rule in this position.

5. This dimension should be around 5-1/2 inch, plus or
minus 3/32 of an inch.
Figure 20A=2
2. Check that the bevel arrow (A) is pointing to the

zero degree mark on the bevel scale (B) located on
the front of the cabinet. See figure 20-1.
3. To adjust arrow, loosen the Philips head screw (C)

and reposition the bevel arrow and tighten screw.
See figure 20-1.
BLADE HEEL ALIGNMENT
CHECKING BLADE ALIGNMENT
Blade heel is the misalignment of the blade to the miter

slots. This means when the blade is not parallel to the
miter slots it is heeling. The blade is set parallel at the
factory and should not need any adjustments. You can
check this by using a dial indicator (not included) or a
combination square (not included). It is recommended 6. Rotate the saw blade back so that you take the
to check the alignment before initial operation as fol- measurement from the same spot on the saw
lows: blade. See Figure 20A-2.
7. Take a reading at the rear of the blade (E) with the

combination square. If there is a difference of more
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from than four pieces of standard printer paper between
the rule and the blade then adjustment will have to
the power source. be made.
Figure 20A=1 8, If an adjustment is necessary see "ADJUSTING

BLADE ALIGNMENT".
ADJUSTING BLADE ALIGNMENT
f
Blade alignment is factory set and should not need
adjustment. All saw blades have some runout.
Therefore, readjusting the blade alignment should only
be attempted if it becomes necessary (see checking
blade alignment).

the power source.
A
27
Figure 20B=1 RIP FENCE OPERATIONS
AND ADJUSTMENTS
\

the power source.
The rip fence can be used on either side of the saw

blade. The most common location is on the right hand
side. This fence is a front locking fence, meaning it
only clamps on the front rail. The fence slides across
the front and rear rails.
Figure 21=1
B
C G D F
1. To align the blade parallel to the miter slot, first

loosen two hex head screws (A) under the left side
of the table saw. This is the same side as the bevel
handwheel (B). See figure 20B-1.
Figure 20B=2
c C
H
E
1. To move the rip fence, lift up on the fence handle

(A) and slide the fence back and forth across the
saw table. Note: The fence handle is spring loaded
and will stay in the up position until press down on.
See figure 21-1.
2. To lock the fence from sliding side to side, push
down on the fence handle.
2. Open motor cover located on the right side of the ADJUSTING FENCE SLIDE
table saw. Loosen two hex head screws (C) locat-
ed directly above the opening. See Figure 20B-2.
3. The saw table is now loose and can be reposi-
tioned until the blade is parallel to the miter slot. MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from
Repeat steps in "CHECKING BLADE ALIGN- the power source.
MENT".
To make sure your fence slides smoothly there are sev-
4. When blade is parallel to miter slot tighten all four eral items to check.
hex head screws.
5. Recheck blade alignment.

6. Tilt the blade to 45 degrees, and rotate the saw
blade by hand. Make sure the blade does not con-
28
Figure 21A-1 Figure 21A=3
B G F
/,
B H
Make sure that the nylon set screws (A) and nylon
glide pads (B) are in place and are not damaged, 3, Make sure there is a consistent gap between the
gouged or have sharp edges. See figure 21A-1. bottom of the fence (F) and the saw table (G). This
Note: Some models do not have the Micro- gap should be same as the thickness of a dime,
Adjustment Assembly as shown in figure 21A-1. around 0.050". To adjust the gap at the front of the
fence turn nylon set screws (H) evenly. See figure
21A-3.
Figure 21A=2
To adjust the gap at the rear of the fence, loosen two
screws (I). The screws are located inside of the fence
end cap (J). The fence hold down (K) will have to be
rotated down to access the two screws. Reposition the
fence end cap to set the gap and tighten the two
screws. See figure 21A-4.
Figure 21A=4
2. Make sure that both the front and rear rails (C) are
parallel to the saw table (D). Use a combination
square (E) to check parallel. See figure 21A-2.
29
Figure 21A-5 ADJUSTING RiP FENCE PARALLEL:
1. To adjust the rip fence parallel to the miter gauge
Clean and wax groove, position the rip fence (B) along the right
side (C) of the right hand miter gauge groove and
lock the fence. The rip fence should be parallel to
the miter gauge groove. If an adjustment is neces-
sary, proceed to the next step. See figure 21-1.
2. Lift the fence handle and slightly loosen hex head
screw (G). Lightly tap on the rear of the fence until
the rip fence is parallel to the miter gauge groove.
Lock the fence and retighten hex head screws.
Unlock the fence and move it side to side. Lock and
recheck it for parallel. See figure 21-1.
ADJUSTING RiP FENCE SQUARE:
1. To adjust the rip fence square to the table surface,

lock the fence in place and place a square on the
saw table and against the side of the rip fence. If the
MAKE CERTAIN you read and follow all directions and rip fence is out-of-square, proceed to the next step.
warnings on the cleaner. 2. Unlock the rip fence handle and adjust one or both
set screws (H) to make the rip fence square to the
4. Clean the front and rear rail with rubbing alcohol or saw table. Lock the rip fence handle and recheck.
automotive brake cleaner. Make sure not to get
CAUTION
cleaner on any painted surfaces. After cleaning,
wax the entire front and rear rail. For models that Keep about 1mm gap between saw table and
bottom of fence. Ten sheets of printer paper are
have the Micro-Adjustment assembly, do not wax
about lmm. See figure 21-1.
the area of the front rail where the rubber wheel
from the micro-adjust contacts. ADJUSTING CLAMPING PRESSURE:
1. After the rip fence is parallel to the miter gauge

ADJUSTING RiP SCALE groove, check to see if there is adequate clamping
force to hold the rip fence in place. If you can lift
1. To adjust the right scale, align left fence side (B) at
a distance from the right side (C) of the right miter the rip fence up off the front rail while it is locked, it
needs adjusted.
gauge groove and lock the fence. See figure 21-1.
2. To adjust the clamping pressure of the rip fence,
slightly loosen two hex socket head screws under-
neath fence body (I). To increase clamping pres-
3. Loosen two screws attaching the cursor (E) to the sure turn set screw (J) clockwise; to decrease
right side of fence cross arm. See figure 21-1. clamping pressure turn set screw counterclockwise
and tighten both hex socket head screws. Note:
4. Align cursor with the scale (F) so that the thin black
Only make small adjustments to set screw (J) and
line (D) is on the same number as the distance
recheck. See figure 21-1.
measured in step 4. Tighten the cursor screws.
5. To adjust the left scale, remove fence from table Figure 21=2
and reposition it on left side of saw blade. Align
K
right fence side at a distance from the left side of
left miter gauge groove and lock the fence.

the saw blade left side to the right fence side.
7. Loosen two screws attaching the cursor to the left
side of fence cross arm.
8. Align cursor with the scale so that the thin black line
is on the same number as the distance measured in
step 6. Tighten the cursor screws.
The rip fence must be properly aligned to the miter gauge

groove in order to prevent "kickback" when ripping.
30
REARHOLD-DOWN CAUTION
It is necessary when performing special operations
Tominimizetheamountthe rearofthefence(K) such as moulding, to add wood facing (A) to one or
comesoffthesawtable,simplyflipdowntherear both sides of the rip fence (B). A 3/4-inch facing to the
holddown(L)sothatit is underthe rearrail.This
limitstheamountthattherearofthefencewilllift. rip fence is suitable for most work although an occa-
sional job may require 1-inch facing. See figure 22-2.
Seefigure21-2.
CAUTION
USING AUXiLiARY FENCE ON RiP FENCE
A wood facing should be used when ripping thin materi-
al such as paneling to prevent the material from catch-
ing between the bottom of the rip fence and saw table
• MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from surface.
the power source.
• TO AVOID KICKBACK always position auxiliary

fence at least 2-inches in front of the saw blade when RiP FENCE MICRO=ADJUSTMENT
being used as a stop for crosscutting.
• Never use the aluminum auxiliary fence while

performing a molding cutter head or dado operation. MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from
A wooden auxiliary fence (not included) must be used the power source when making adjustments.
for these operations.

A
1. Note: When using the auxiliary fence supplied with

your saw you must subtract 1" from the rip scale.
This is because the auxiliary fence is 1-inch thick.
2. When using the auxiliary fence as a cut-off stop,

first assemble auxiliary fence to the rip fence.
3. Position the beginning of the auxiliary fence (A) at

least 2-inches in front of the saw blade (B) and
tighten both clamp knobs (C). See figure 22-1.
4. If using the rip scale to set the cut length, subtract 1. Make sure the rip fence is not locked.
1" from the rip scale for the finish cut measurement.
2. To engage the micro-adjustment, push in knob (A).
Make sure rip fence is locked before any cuts are
See figure 23-1.
made.
3. Turn knob clockwise to move the rip fence to the
Fig. 22=2 left and counter-clockwise to move it to the right.
A
31
TABLE iNSERT ADJUSTMENT Figure 25=1
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from A

the power source when making adjustments. C /
Figure 24=1
B
"A
1. The table insert (A) must always be level with the 1. Make sure switch is "OFF" and disconnect power
saw table (B). To adjust the table insert, loosen cord from power source.
and remove table insert retaining bolt (C). See
figure 24-1. 2. Open motor cover and verify on the motor tag (A)
that motor is dual voltage. See figure 25-1.
2. Place a straight edge across the front and rear of
the table insert. Check that the insert is perfectly 3. If motor tag states that it is dual voltage remove junc-
level with the saw table. tion box cover (B) on motor (C). See figure 25-1.
3. To level the table insert, turn the one or more
adjusting set screws (D) as needed and recheck. 4. Using wiring diagram on inside of junction box
See figure 24-1. cover, reconnect motor leads for 240-volt operation.
4. Once the insert is level, secure the insert with the 5. Replace junction box cover and close motor cover.
retaining bolt removed in step 1.
6. Replace 120 volt plug with a UL/CSA Listed 240
5. The table insert is equipped with a finger hole (E)
volt plug rated for current of the motor.
for easy removal. See figure 24-1.
7. The ON/OFF switch is 4-pole and does not need
CHANGING MOTOR VOLTAGE modified.
• MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from

the power source before working on motor.
• Have a certified electrician make all electrical connec-
tions. All local and state codes must be maintained.
The motor supplied with the table saw is a dual voltage

120/240-volt, single phase motor. The motor is wired
from the factory for 120-volt operation. To change to
240-volt operation for your table saw, proceed with the
following instructions. It is also necessary to replace
the 120 volt plug, supplied with the table saw, with a
UL/CSA Listed plug (not included) suitable for 240 volts
and the rated current of the motor. The table saw with a
240 volt plug should only be connected to an outlet
having the same configuration as the plug. No adapter
is available or should be used with the 240 volt plug.
32
CHANGING THE SAW BLADE Figure 26A=1
• Turn the power switch "OFF" and unplug the power

cord from its power source when changing the saw
blade.
• USE ONLY 10-in. diameter blades with 5/8-in. arbor

holes, rated at or higher than 3800 R.P.M.
Figure 26=1
E
B
1. To adjust front splitter bracket (A), loosen the two

hex socket head cap screws (B). See Fig 26A-1.
1. Remove blade guard and splitter. Figure 26A=2

2. Remove the table insert retaining bolt and remove
the table insert.
3. Unlock the raise/lower handwheel lock and raise
saw blade to maximum height.
4. Two wrenches are supplied with the table saw.
Place one open-end wrench (A) on the flat of the
\
saw arbor to keep it from turning. Place the closed-
end wrench (B) on the arbor nut (C). Turn the arbor
nut wrench toward the front of saw to loosen it.
Remove arbor nut, blade flange (D) and saw blade \
\
(E). See figure 26-1. \
\.
5. Assemble the new saw blade, make certain the
teeth point down at the front of the saw table and
assemble the blade flange and arbor nut. With
\
both blade wrenches as previously mentioned, \
tighten arbor nut in the opposite direction from
which it was loosened.
6. Replace table insert and tighten the table insert 2. Place a straight edge(C) along the left side of blade
retaining bolt. (D) and adjust the front splitter bracket to align the
splitter (E) with the blade. See figure 26A-2.
7. Replace blade guard and splitter.
3. Retighten the two hex socket head cap screws after
ALIGNING SPLITTER BRACKET the splitter has been aligned.
4. If necessary, adjust the rear splitter bracket (F)

make certain that entire splitter is in line with the
MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from saw blade. See figure 26A-2.
the power source. 5. Recheck to make certain the splitter is still square
to the saw table. If adjustments are necessary, see
BLADE GUARD AND SPMTTER ASSEMBLY.
33
MITER GAUGE OPERATION 7. Push in plunger and make adjustments to stop
AND ADJUSTMENT screw (G) so that it touches the plunger and tighten
lock nut. See figure 27-2.
8. Recheck the positive stop angle to the saw blade.

MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from Insert the guide bar into the miter gauge groove
the power source when making adjustments. and slide the miter gauge up to the saw blade.
9. To check, place a square against the saw blade

Figure 27=1 and miter gauge body. If any more adjustments are
need repeat steps above.
10. To set both 45-degree positive stops, repeat steps
above.
CLAMP AND FENCE STOP OPERATION
C E MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from

the power source when making adjustments.
1. The miter gauge has adjustable positive stops at
O-degree and plus or minus 45-degrees or it can be Figure 28=1
E
manually set at any angle between plus or minus
60-degrees.
2. To rotate miter gauge body (A), loosen knob (B) and

pull out plunger (C) and rotate miter gauge body to B C
3.
desired angle and tighten knob. See figure 27-1.
To rotate to the next positive stop pull plunger out,

\
rotate miter gauge body then push plunger back in
and continue rotating miter gauge body until it stops
against next positive stop.
4. To adjust O-degree positive stops, loosen knob, pull

out on plunger and turn miter gauge over.
Figure 27=2 D
D
1. The stock clamp (A) can be positioned in and out
by loosening the two knobs (B) and sliding the
clamp body in or out. Retighten knobs when at
desired position. See figure 28-1.
2. The stock clamp has a quick release allowing you

to quickly position the clamp up or down. To
engage quick release press up on trigger (C) and
hold. The clamping pad (D) will fall or it can be
lifted. To release let go of the trigger. Now you
can turn knob (E) to apply clamping pressure.
See figure 28-1.
3. The fence stop (F) can be reposition along the

fence by loosening the hex socket head screw (G).
5, Loosen the lock nut (D) 3 or 4 turns. See figure 27-2. Slide the fence stop to desired position and tighten
6. Place a square against the guide bar (E) and front hex socket head screw. If the fence stop is not
of the miter gauge body (F). Square the miter needed, it can be stored out of the way on the
gauge body to the guide bar and tighten knob. backside of the fence. See figure 28-1.
See figure 27-1.
34
CROSS CUTTING Figure 29=2
Crosscutting requires the use of the miter gauge (A) to
position and guide the workpiece (B). See figure 24-1.
The use of non-Craftsman attachments and acces-

sories may result in risk of injury or damage to the
table saw.
Figure 29=1
D A
AUXILIARY FENCE
For added safety and convenience, the miter gauge can
be fitted with an auxiliary fence (E) if not already sup-
plied with one. If the auxiliary fence is not provided with
your saw, one can be purchased as an accessory or
one can be made from a dimensional piece of hard-
wood. This auxiliary fence can be fastened to the front
of the miter gauge by using two screws (not included)
through the slots (not shown) in the miter gauge body.
See figure 29-2.
Figure 29=3
TO CROSSCUT:
1. Place the workpiece against the miter gauge and
advance both the miter gauge and workpiece
toward the saw blade (C). See figure 29-1.
. K /
Note: The miter gauge may be used in either one of
the miter gauge grooves. When bevel cutting (blade
tilted), use the right hand miter gauge groove so that the
Made tilts away from the miter gauge and your hands.
2. Start the cut slowly and hold the workpiece firmly

against the miter gauge and the table.
To avoid serious injury, NEVER hang onto or touch the

part of the workpiece that is going to be cut off (D). CUT-OFF GAUGE
3. Continue cutting until the workpiece is cut in two. 1. When cross-cutting a number of pieces to the same
4. Slide the miter gauge and workpiece back to the length, clamp a block (F) of wood to the fence (J) to
starting point. use as a cut-off gauge. It is important that this block
of wood always be positioned in front of the saw
NOTE: Before sliding the workpiece back, give the blade. See figure 29-3.
workpiece a little sideways shift to move it slightly away
from the saw blade. CAUTION
When using the block as a cut-off gauge, it is very
important that the rear end of the block be positioned
NEVER pick up any short cut off scrap pieces from the so the workpiece is clear of the block before it enters
table while the saw is running. Wait until the saw blade the blade.
has come to a complete stop.
Never use the fence as a cut-off gauge when crossuctting.
35
Whencross-cutting a numberof piecestothesame and make solid contact with the saw table. The blade
length,a blockofwoodcanbeclampedtothefence guard (B) and splitter assembly (C) must be used. The
andusedas a cut-offgaugeas shown.It is important splitter has anti-kickback fingers (D) to prevent the
thatthisblockof woodalwaysbepositionedinfrontof workpiece from kicking back, and the splitter assembly
thesawbladeas shown.Oncethecut-offlengthis to prevent the wood kerf from closing and binding on
determined, securethefenceandusethemitergauge the blade. See figure 30-1.
tofeedtheworkintotheblade.Thisblockof wood
1. With the workpiece clear of the saw blade, start the
allowsthecut-offpieceto movefreelyalongthetable motor.
surfacewithoutbindingbetweenthefenceandthesaw
table,therebylesseningthepossibility
of kickbackand 2. Place the workpiece on the saw table with the
injurytotheoperator. straight edge against the fence.
Note:Thisblockallowsthecut-offscrappiecetomove 3. Advance the workpiece slowly, holding it down and

against the fence, then into the saw blade.
freelyalongthetablesurfacewithoutbindingbetween
thefenceandtheblade,therebylesseningthepossibil- Note: The workpiece can be fed through the saw blade
ityofkickbackandinjuryto theoperator.
with one or two hands depending on the size.
2, Once the cut-off length is determined, lock the 4. After the workpiece is beyond the saw blade and
fence and slide the workpiece across the table anti-kickback fingers, you can remove your hand
surface until it contacts the block. Use the miter from the workpiece. When this is done, the work-
gauge (K) to feed the workpiece into the blade. piece will either stay on the table, tilt up slightly and
be caught by the rear end of the guard, or slide off
the table to the floor. Alternately, the feed can con-
tinue to the end of the table, after which the work-
To avoid kickback when using the block (F) as a cut-off piece is lifted and brought back along the outside
gauge, it is very important that the rear end of the block edge of the fence.
(G) be positioned so the workpiece (H) is clear of the
5. The cut-off part of the workpiece remains on the
block before it enters the blade (I). Never use the fence
table and is not touched until the saw blade has
(J) as a cut-off gauge when crosscutting. See
figure 29-3. come to a complete stop.
CAUTION
RIPPING
When ripping a workpiece longer than three feet, it is
. NEVER stand in the line of the saw blade path when recommended that the workpiece be supported at the
ripping. rear of the table saw to keep it from falling. A roller
stand can be purchased to support long workpieces to
• ALWAYS keep hands and fingers away from the saw the rear of a table saw.
blade.
CAUTION
If the workpiece is to be cut less than 4-inches wide, a
push stick (E) or guide should always be used to keep
Figure 30=1 your hands away from the saw blade. See figure 30-2.
Figure 30=2
\
C
Ripping is the operation of making a cut with the grain

of the workpiece; the rip fence (A) is used to position An accessory Craftsman Fence Guide can be purchased
and guide the workpiece. Since the workpiece is to assist when making narrow cuts. See "ACCESSOR-
pushed along the fence, it must have a straight edge IES AND ATTACHMENTS" section in this manual.
36
DADO BLADE SET Dado blades and chippers have a set to their teeth. The
teeth of the dado blades and chippers must be
arranged so that the set of each tooth overlaps the next
tooth. The set of the dado blade (C) and chipper (D)
The blade guard and splitter assembly cannot be used overlap as shown in Figure 31-3. A shim (E) can be
when dadoing or molding and must be swung to the used as needed to control the exact width of a dado.
rear of the saw. Blade guard must be reassembled See figures 31-2 and 31-3.
when finished dadoing or molding.
Figure 31=3
Figure 31=1 B
....-D
/
©
When the dado blade width is 13/16-inch, the outside
arbor flange (F) cannot be used. Only the arbor nut (G)
should be used; tighten the arbor nut against the dado
A blade body. Do not lose the outside arbor flange, for it
will be needed when reattaching a blade to the saw
Dadoing is cutting a non-through cut that produces a arbor. Also, an accessory dado blade table insert (H)
square notch into the workpiece. Most dado blade sets (not included) must be used in place of the standard
(not included) are made up of two outside dado blades table insert. See figure 31-4.
(A) and four or five inside chippers (B). Shims (E) can
be placed between blades and chippers to slightly vary
the width of a dado. No more than two shims should be Figure 31=4
placed together between one set of blades or chippers.
Shims can be made of heavy paper, brass or metal.
Various combinations of the dado blades and chippers
are used to cut grooves from 1/8" to 13/16" for use in
shelving, making joints, tenons, grooving, etc. See
figures 31-1,31-2, and 31-3.
Figure 31=2
H o
(NOT INCLUDED)
The blade guard and splitter assembly cannot be used

when dadoing and must be swung to the rear of the
saw.
37
Figure 31=5
• The blade guard and splitter assembly cannot be

used when dadoing or molding and must be swung to
the rear of the saw. Blade guard must be reassem-
bled when finished.
Figure 32=2
\o
\
Figure 31-5, shows a typical dado operation using the

miter gauge.
• Never use the dado head in a bevel position.
• Always install blade guard and splitter assembly after

dado operation is completed.
Figure 32-2 shows the molding cutterhead is assembled

MOLDING HEAD CUTTER to the saw arbor as shown.
Molding is cutting a shape on the edge or face of the
workpiece. Cutting moldings with a molding cutterhead If the outside arbor flange (D) cannot be used with the
(not included) on the circular saw is a fast, safe and molding cutterhead, tighten the arbor nut (E) against
clean operation. The many different knife shapes avail- the cutterhead body. Do not lose the outside arbor
able make it possible for the operator to produce almost flange, for it will be needed when reattaching a blade to
any kind of molding, such as various styles of corner the saw arbor. Also, an accessory molding cutterhead
moulds, picture frames, table edges, etc. table insert (F) (not included) must be used in place of
the standard table insert. See figure 32-2.
Figure 32=1
Figure 32=3
B
G
The molding head consists of a cutterhead (A) in which

It is necessary when using the molding cutterhead to
you can mount various shapes of steel knives (B).
add a wood facing (G) to the face of the rip fence (H).
Each of the three knives in a set is fitted into a groove
The wood facing is attached to the fence with fasteners.
in the cutterhead and securely clamped with a screw.
A 3/4-inch facing is suitable for most work although
The knife grooves (C) should be kept free of sawdust,
an occasional job may require 1-inch facing. See
which would prevent the cutter from seating properly.
figure 32-3.
See figure 32-1.
38
Positionthewoodfacingoverthecutterheadwiththe CAUTION
cutterheadbelowthesurfaceofthetable. Turnthesaw
When molding end grain, the miter gauge must be
onandraisethecutterheadslowly.Thecutterheadwill used. The feed should be slowed up at the end of
cutitsowngrooveinthewoodfacing. the cut to prevent splintering
In all cuts, pay attention to the grain, making the cuts

in the same direction as the grain whenever possible.
• Neverusemoldingcutterhead in a bevelposition.
Neverruntheworkpiece betweenthefenceandthe
moldingcutterhead
as irregularshapedwoodwill
causekickback.
BACKLASH ADJUSTMENTS FOR PROTECTING CAST IRON TABLE

BLADE RAISING/LOWERING AND FROM RUST
BLADE TiLTiNG ASSEMBLIES
If any play is detected in the blade raising/lowering or

blade tilting assemblies, the following adjustments MAKE CERTAIN to turn the power "OFF" and unplug
should be made. the power cord from its power source.
The environment and frequency of human contact can

have a very detrimental impact on unpainted cast iron
surfaces. Moisture, humidity and oils (from human
Turn the power switch "OFF" and unplug the power hands!) can cause the unpainted cast iron surfaces to
cord from its power source when making adjustments. mar or rust, so it is important to conduct routine mainte-
nance to keep your table saw looking new. Cleaning
NOTE: In the illustration below, the table saw has been and waxing the cast iron surfaces on a regular mainte-
turned upside down and the blade removed for clarity. nance schedule is recommended as follows:
To clean and maintain the unpainted cast iron sur-

faces:
Figure 33=1
Apply a heavy coat of WD-40 onto the unpainted cast
c iron surface.
Use a fine steel wool pad to buff the unpainted cast

iron. Make sure to buff in a "front to rear" direction
only. A side-to-side buffing motion will show in the
finely ground cast iron as a flaw, defect or scratches.
Reapply WD-40 and buff the unpainted cast iron sur-

faces until the stains or rust is removed. Make sure
you use the same front-to-rear buffing direction to
avoid scratching or marring the cast iron surface.
After all stains and/or rust have been removed, clean

all oil and dirt from the table saw using a soft cloth or
B A rag.
Lastly, you need to apply a good automotive paste

1, To adjust the blade raising/lowering assembly, wax to all unpainted cast iron surfaces. This will help
loosen lock-nut (A) and turn the eccentric sleeve to protect the saw from rusting from further contact
(B) until all play is removed in the assembly, then with moisture or oily hands.
tighten lock-nut. See figure 33-1
2, To adjust the blade tilting assembly, loosen lock-nut

(C) and turn the eccentric (D) until all play is
removed in the assembly, then tighten the lock-nut.
See figure 33-1.
39
LUBRiCATiON
The table saw has sealed lubricated bearings in the

Only trained personnel should perform repairs to the
motor housing that do not require any additional lubrica-
table saw. Contact your nearest Sears Service Center
tion from the operator.
for authorized service. Unauthorized repairs or replace-
ment with non-factory parts could cause serious injury
CLEANING to the operator and damage to the table saw.
With the table saw unplugged, blow off motor with low-
pressure air to remove dust or dirt. Air pressure above
50 R S. I. should not be used as high-pressured air
may damage insulation. The operator should always
wear eye protection when using compressed air.
Do not allow chips and dust to accumulate under table

saw. Keep area clean and in safe order.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE MATERIALS

to clean table saw.
40
TOPREVENT
INJURYTOYOURSELF or damage to the table saw, turn the power switch to the "OFF" position and
unplug the power cord from the electrical receptacle before making any adjustments.
PROBLEM LIKELY CAUSE(S) SOLUTION
Motor does not 1, Switch not pressed in far enough or switch 1, Depress switch in 1/2 inch or make sure switch is in the
start: in the "OFF" position. "ON" position.
2. Defective switch. 2. Have switch replaced.
3. Defective capacitor. 3. Have capacitor replaced.
4. Low line voltage. 4. Correct low line voltage condition. If saw is plugged into an
extension cord, plug saw directly into wall outlet.
5. Defective motor. 5. Have motor replaced.
NOTE: 3 and 4 must be done by a qualified service
technician.
Motor stalls, 1. Circuit overload. 1. Reduce circuit load (turn off other appliances)
thermal-overload
2. Low line voltage. 2. Correct low line voltage condition. Check line voltage with a
trips or circuit multi-meter. If saw is plugged into an extension cord,
breakers open unplug saw from extension cord and plug saw directly to
frequently: wall outlet.
3. Motor overload. 3. Reduce load on motor, slow down feed rate of workpiece
being pushed into blade.
4. Incorrect fuses on circuit breakers. 4. Have correct fuses on circuit breakers installed by a quali-
fied electrician.
5. Short circuit in motor; loose connections or 5. Inspect terminals in motor for damaged insulation and
worn insulation on lead wires. shorted wires and have them replaced. Check all power
lead connections.
Motor starts 1. Low line voltage. 1. Correct low line voltage condition. Check line voltage with a
slowly or fails to multi-meter. If saw is plugged into an extension cord,
come to full speed: unplug saw from extension cord and plug saw directly to
wall outlet.
2. Defective motor windings. 2. Have motor replaced.
3. Defective capacitor. 3. Have capacitor replaced
Motor running too 1. Restricted air circulation due to dust 1. Clean dust and restore normal air circulation around motor.
hot: accumulation. 2. Reduce load on motor.
2. Motor overload.
Handwheels are hard 1. Handwheel Lock Knob has not been loosened. 1. Loosen Handwheel Lock Knob.
to turn: 2. Dust accumulation on tilting or beveling gears 2. Clean off tilt and bevel gear assemblies.
inside of cabinet.
Miter gauge does not 1. Miter gauge groove and miter gauge bar are 1. Clean miter gauge groove and bar.
move smoothly: dirty. 2. Adjust set-screws in miter gauge bar.
2. Set-screws in miter gauge bar are out of
adjustment.
Workpiece binds, 1. Blade is dull. 1. Sharpen or replace blade.

burns or stalls motor
2. Board is warped or twisted. 2. Replace board.
when ripping:
3. Rip fence is not parallel to blade. 3. See "Fence Alignment" in Operation and Adjustment
Section.
Saw blade does not 1. Blade is dull. 1. Sharpen or replace blade.

cut true at 90 or 45
2. Indicator arrow is not properly adjusted. 2. Adjust bevel indicator arrow.
degrees:
3. Positive stops are not set properly. 3. Adjust 90 and 45-degree positive stops.
Rip fence does not 1. Rip fence is not mounted properly. 1. See "Fence Alignment" in Operation and Adjustment Section.
move smoothly: 2. Rails are dirty or sticky. 2. Clean and apply paste wax to rails.
Saw vibrates 1. Blade is warped. 1. Replace blade.

excessively: 2. Drive belt is damaged. 2. Replace drive belt.
3. Reposition saw on a flat surface. Adjust leveling feet, if
3. Work surface is uneven. supplied with saw.
4. Saw is not mounted securely. 4. Tighten all hardware.
41
1O-IN.TABLESAW MODEL NO.152.221140
When servicing, use only CRAFTSMAN replacement parts. Use of any other parts may create a HAZARD or cause
product damage.
Any attempt to repair or replace electrical parts on this table saw may create a HAZARD unless a qualified service
technician does repairs. Repair service is available at your nearest Sears Service Center.
Always order by PART NUMBER, not by key number.
*AVAILABLE AT MOST RETAIL STORES
Ref No. Part No. DESCRIPTION GTY 111 STD851004 FLAT WASHER M4 1
N/A OR91551 OWNER'S MANUAL - #22114 10" Table Saw 1 112 OR91774 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 10ram 1
N/A OR91710 BLADE GUARD ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 113 OR91075 CLAMP PAD 1
CONSISTS OF REF #: 1,2, 3, 3a, 3b 4, 5, 6, 7, 16, 24 & 25 N/A 114 OR91076 MITER GAGE BODY 1
N/A OR91711 SPLITTER BRACKET ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 115 OR91077 SPECIAL WASHER, T-SLOT 1
CONSISTS OF REF #: 9, 9a, 10, 11, 12, 13,14, 15 & 17 N/A 116 OR91074 SPECIAL SCREW 1
1 OR91785 PUSH NUT (CHROME) 117 OR91118 SQUARE NUT M6 2
2 OR91781 PIN 118 OR91078 CROSS CUT FENCE 1
3 OR91627 "SEE THRU" BLADE GUARD 119 OR91079 GUIDE BAR 1
3A OR91574 WARNING LABEL 120 OR91763 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M4 x 16ram 4
3B OR91575 WARNING LABEL PICTORAL 121 OR91783 PIN 1/4" x 3/4" 1
4 OR91782 PIN 122 OR91774 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 10ram 2
5 OR91008 GUARD BRACKET 123 OR91080 PLUNGER 1
6 OR91834 PUSH NUT (BLACK) 124 OR91081 PLUNGER BLOCK 1
7 OR91745 GUARD SPRING 125 OR91082 CURSOR 1
8 OR91631 SPLITTER MOUNTING ROD 126 OR91775 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 16ram 1
9 OR91812 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 22ram 127 OR91776 PAN HEAD SCREW M4 x 20ram 3
9A STD852066 LOCK WASHER M6 127A STD840407 HEX NUT M4 3
10 OR91011 SPLITTER REAR MOUNT LOWER 128 OR91766 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M5 x 20mm 2
11 OR91051 SPLITTER MOUNT SQUARE NUT 2
129 OR91823 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID: 5.3, OD:12, T:1.2)
12 OR91012 SPLITTER REAR MOUNT UPPER 130 OR91573 MITER SCALE
13 OR91820 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:6.4mm, OD:18mm, T:1.6mm) 131 OR91084 SPECIAL WASHER, MITER HANDLE
14 STD852606 LOCK WASHER M6 132 OR91085 MITER GAUGE KNOB
15 OR91758 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 16ram 133 OR91086 ELEVATING ROD
16 OR91015 SPLITTER 134 OR91756 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M5 x 2Omm
17 OR91048 SPLITTER KNOB
134A OR91823 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:5.3, OD:12, T:1.2)
18 OR91760 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 6ram 135 OR91087 DEPTH STOP
19 OR91820 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:6.4mm, OD:18mm, ]_1.6ram) 136 OR91118 SQUARE NUT M5
20 OR91758 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 16ram 200 OR91767 JAM NUT 5/8-18-LH
21 OR91610 SPLITTER FRONT MOUNT 201 OR91020 ARBOR PULLEY
21A OR91791 SPRING PIN 3ram x 10ram 202 OR91824 KEY 5ram x 5ram x 15ram
22 OR91613 SPLITTER SPRING CLIP 203 OR91734 BEARING CLOSURE NUT
23 OR91753 SPECIAL HEX NUT M12 263A OR91732 ARBOR SPACER
24 OR91795 SPRING PIN 4ram x 22ram 264 OR91733 BALL BEARING <6203 LLB>
25 OR91009 ANTI - KICKBACK FINGER 205 OR91004 ELEVATING BRACKET
30 OR91789 SET SCREW 1/4-28 x 3/8", NYLOCK 266 OR91024 ARBOR SLEEVE
31 OR91014 TABLE INSERT - STANDARD 267 OR91801 WAVE WASHER <BWW 6203>
32 OR91652 TABLE INSERT RETAINING BOLT 208 OR91733 BALL BEARING <6203 LLB>
33 OR91815 TABLE 209 OR91022 ARBOR SHAFT
34 OR91821 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M8 x 20ram
210A OR91720 10" BLADE, 40 TOOTH, A.T.B., 5/6" BORE
35 OR91621 ALIGN-A-CUT INSERT 211 OR91026 BLADE FLANGE
36 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 212 OR91050 BLADE HEX NUT-RH
37 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 213 STD836045 HEX HEAD SCREW M16x1.5 x 45mm 2
38 STD835030 HEX HEAD SCREW M8x1.25 x 30mm 214 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M10 2
39B OR91093 EXTENSION WING 10" CAST IRON 215 OR91003 REAR BRACKET 1
40 OR91817 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER 216 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M1O 2
41 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 217 STD852010 LOCK WASHER M1O 2
42 STD835025 HEX HEAD SCREW M8x1.25 x 25mm 218 STD841015 HEX NUT M1Oxl.5 2
60 OR91046 SWITCH PADDLE 1
220 OR91721 BELT (28" 6Rib Jsection PolyV )+E142
60A OR90375 PADLOCK AND KEY 221 OR90253 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M5 x 12mm 1
61A OR91712 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 222 OR91023 MOTOR PULLEY 1
63A OR91579 SWITCH RESET LABEL 223 OR91770 KEY 5mm x 5mm x 36mm 1
65 OR91822 SQUARE NUT M6 (11ram Square) 224B OR91722 MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1.5 HP 1
67 STD833012 HEX HEAD SCREW M6 x 12ram 224C OR91723 START CAPACITOR 1
100 OR91065 CLAMP KNOB 224D OR91724 RUN CAPACITOR 1
101 OR91666 CLAMP BODY 225B OR91576 MOTOR SPEC PLATE 1.5 HP 1
102 OR91067 UPPER BUSHING 225C OR91678 MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM LABEL 1
103 OR91068 ELEVATING KNOB 226 STD835030 HEX HEAD SCREW M8x1.26 x 30mm 4
104 OR91796 SPRING PIN 4ram x 25ram 226A STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
106 OR91069 QUICK RELEASE SPRING 227 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
106 OR91070 QUICK RELEASE BRACKET 228 OR91001 MOTOR BRACKET 1
107 OR91797 SPRING PIN 6ram x 25ram 229 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
108 OR91071 LOWER BUSHING 230 STD840812 HEX NUT M8xl.25 4
109 OR91072 ELEVATING ROD 231 OR91825 SPRING PIN 8ram x 35ram 1
110 OR91673 CLAMP FOOT 232 OR91771 LOCK NUT 1/2-13UNC 3
42
104N. TABLE SAW MODEL NO. 152.221140
233 OR91784 PLATE WASHER 416A OR91806 HEX BUTTON HEAD CAP SCREW M8x1.25 x 25ram 4
234 OR91802 WAVE WASHER 416B STD840812 HEX NUT M8x1.25 2
235 OR91054 MOTOR MOUNT STUD 416C STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 2
236 OR91056 MOTOR SPRING 416D STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
237 OR91057 STUD 416E OR91164 REAR RAIL 2
240 OR91790 SHAFT 416F OR91809 HEX BUTTON HEAD CAP SCREW M8 x 1.25 x 35ram 2
241 OR91757 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M5 x 20ram, NYL©K 416G STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
243 OR91116 ELEVATING SHAFT ASSEMBLY 416H STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
244 OR91793 SPRING PIN 3ram x 20ram 417 OR91828 PAN HEAD SELF TAP SCREW M4 x 16ram 4
245 STD541231 ,JAM NUT 5/8-18 418 OR91194 END CAP, RIGHT HAND 1
248 OR91803 TRUNNION ASSEMBLY 419 OR91705 FRONT RAIL WITH SCALE, RIGHT HAND (25") ASSEMBLY 1
249 OR91800 WAVE WASHER E188 419A OR91813 SQUARE HEAD SCREW M8 x 35ram 4
251 OR91028 RAISE/LOWER SLEEVE 419B STD840812 HEX NUT M8xl.26 4
252 OR91029 RAISE/LOWER SPACER 419C STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
253 OR91019 POINTER 419D STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 4
254 OR90659 FLAT WASHER M6 420 OR91706 FRONT RAIL WITH SCALE, LEFT HAND (24") ASSEMBLY 1
255 OR91826 CHEESE HEAD SCREW M6 x 16mm 420A OR91569 SCALE, RIGHT HAND - 25-inch 1
N/A OR91864 HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 420B OR91568 SCALE, LEFT HAND - 24-inch 1
CONSISTS OF: 256, 256A, 256B & 256C N/A 421 OR91185 MICRO-ADJUST SHAFT OVERM©LD ASSEMBLY 1
256 OR91645 HANDWHEEL 422 OR91764 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M5 x 10mm 1
256A OR91641 ELEVATING KNOB ASSEMBLY 423 OR91773 MICRO-ADJUST SPRING 1
256B OR91038 KNOB BOLT 424 OR91187 MICRO-ADJUST KNOB ASSEMBLY 1
256C OR91044 KNOB END CAP 425 OR91829 FLAT HEAD SCREW M4 X 10mm 1
258 OR91046 HANDWHEEL LOCK KNOB 426 OR91196 HANDLE PIVOT SHAFT 1
N/A OR91117 TILT SHAFT ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 427 OR91736 CLAMP CAM 1
CONSISTS OF: 259, 260, 261 & 261A N/A 428 OR91191 FENCE KNOB ASSEMBLY 1
261 OR91117 TILT SHAFT ASSEMBLY 1 43O OR91812 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M6 x 22mm 2
261A OR91793 SPRING PIN 3ram x 2Omm 1 431 STD852006 LOCK WASHER M6 2
262 OR91738 ECCENTRIC 1 432 OR91830 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:6.4, OD:18, T:1.6) 2
263 OR91606 FRONT BRACKET 1 433 OR91739 E-RING #8 2
264 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M1O 2 434 OR91189 BRACKET 1
265 STD836045 HEX HEAD SCREW M1Ox1.5 x 45ram 2 435 OR91188 TENSION CLIP 1
266 OR91018 TILT COLLAR 1 436 STD852006 LOCK WASHER M6 1
266A OR91740 FIBER WASHER 3/8" 1 437 OR91755 HEX SOCKET BUTTON HEAD SCREW M6 x 12mm 1
266B OR91137 COLLAR 1 438 OR91731 SPECIAL SCREW M8 x 26mm 2
266C OR91762 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW 1/4-20 X 1/4" 2 439 OR91183 HEAD CASTING 1
267 OR91816 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M6 x 8ram 1 439A OR91571 DEBRIS WARNING LABEL 1
268 STD840508 HEX NUT M5 2 439B OR91572 LIFTING WARNING LABEL 1
268A OR91827 SPECIAL FLAT WASHER (ID:5.3, ©D:18, T:3) 2 44O OR91730 SPECIAL PLASTIC SET SCREW M8 x 16ram 2
269 OR91617 TILT BRACKET 1 441 OR91192 END CAP, LEFT HAND" 1
270 OR91786 ROUND HEAD SCREW M5 x 25ram 2 444 OR91138 ALIGNMENT BAR 2
N/A OR91804 HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY, (NOT SHOWN) 445 OR90239 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M6 X 6ram 8
CONSISTS OF: 271,271A, 271B & 271C N/A
446 OR91748 HEX HEAD SCREW M6 X 22ram 2
271 OR91045 HANDWHEEL
447 OR91831 INTERNAL TOOTH LOCK WASHER M6 2
271A OR91041 TILTING KNOB ASSY
448 STD851006 FLAT WASHER M6 2
271B OR91638 KNOB BOLT
449 OR91136 GLIDE PAD 2
271C OR91644 KNOB END CAP
450 STD840610 HEX NUT M6 2
273 OR91646 HANDWHEEL LOCK KNOB
561 OR91200 CABINET ASSY WELDMENT 1
274 OR91768 JAM NUT 9/16-18
561A OR91562 SPEC TAG 1
275 STD851010 FLAT WASHER M1O
561B OR91565 BEVEL SCALE 1
276 STD852010 LOCK WASHER M10
501C OR91560 NAMEPLATE 1
277 STD841015 HEX NUT M10xl.5
501D OR91566 BLADE ELEVATION AND TILT LABEL 1
280 OR91726 BOX END WRENCH
502 OR91103 HINGE ASSEMBLY 1
281 OR91727 OPEN END WRENCH
502A STD840508 HEX NUT M5 4
282 OR90289 2.Smm ALLEN WRENCH
502B STD851005 FLAT WASHER M5 4
564 OR91123 MOTOR COVER 1
564A OR91564 WARNING LABEL 1
565 OR91777 PAN HEAD SCREW M5 X 15ram 4
287 OR91808 1/8" ALLEN WRENCH
506 OR91058 LATCH BLACK SWELL ASSEMBLY 2
290 OR91814 CABLE CLAMP
527 OR91134 WRENCH HOOK 1
291 OR91787 ROUND HEAD TAP SCREW 1/4-20 x 3/8"
528 OR91135 FENCE HOOK 2
401 OR91166 CLAMP KNOB
529 OR91832 TRIANGLE TAP SCREW M4 x 8ram 6
402 OR91165 AUXILIARY FENCE
529A OR91832 TRIANGLE TAP SCREW M4 x 8ram 2
403 OR91167 SQUARE NUT 1/4-20
530 OR91177 LEG ASSEMBLY WELDMENT 2
N/A OR91714 FENCE ASSEMBLY (NOT SHOWN)
531 OR91174 RUBBER FOOT PAD 4
CONSISTS OF: 404, 405,406,406A, 407,408,409, 410,
411,412, 413,414, 422,426,427,428,430, 431,432,
433, 434,435, 436,437,438,439,439A, 439B, 440, 533 OR91128 DUST PORT 1
446, 447,448, 449 & 450 N/A 534 STD840812 HEX NUT M8x1.25 8
404 OR91828 PAN HEAD SELF TAP SCREW M4 x 16ram 2 535 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 8
405 OR91168 FENCE TOP 1 536 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 8
405A OR91570 CRAFTSMAN LABEL, VERTICLE 1 538 OR91173 DUST CHUTE WELDMENT 1
406 OR91169 FENCE END CAP 1 539 OR91179 TIE BAR 2
406A OR91764 HEX SOCKET SET SCREW M5 x 10ram 1 540 OR91181 CARRIAGE HEAD SCREW 5/16-18 x 5/8" 8
406B OR91828 PAN HEAD SELF TAP SCREW M4 x 16ram 2 541 STD551031 FLAT WASHER 5/16" 8
407 OR91199 FENCE HOLD DOWN 1 542 STD551131 LOCK WASHER 5/16" 8
408 OR91197 PIVOT PIN 1 543 STD541031 HEX NUT 5/16"-18 8
409 OR91198 PIVOT BUSHING 2 544 STD835025 HEX HEAD SCREW M8xl.25 x 25ram 8
410 OR91162 FENCE EXTRUSION 1 545 STD851008 FLAT WASHER M8 8
411 OR91761 HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREW M8x1.25 x 25ram 2 546 STD835025 HEX HEAD SCREW M8xl.25 x 25ram 4
411A OR90311 FLAT WASHER M8 2 547 STD852008 LOCK WASHER M8 4
412 OR91778 PAN HEAD SCREW M5 x 16ram 4
413 OR90462 FLAT WASHER M5 4
414 OR91182 CURSOR 2
415 OR91195 REAR RAIL CONNECTOR 1
43
o
Z
W
F
m
>
39B
61A
63A
0
m
r-
z
P
o
?
Z
W
r-
m
1
I
2S2
283 0
E84
m
285 r_
286 Z
U_
0
?
Z
W
m
(2)
406B (2)
441
487
411A
410
440
444
445 (8;
459_
438(2)_
437
435_
434_ (2)
433(2)
432,
431
430 (4)
425 421
419D (4)
428 420A
0
(4) m
r-
z
9
o
o
Z
501D
501A
W
r,_
rrl
503(3)
504---
52,
529A(2)
502B
529(6)\ 527\_ /505(4-)
502A(4.)-_
__ 506(2)
501C
"-4
/
501B
0
I'll
r-
Z
P
bO
4_
0
,_ NOTES ,_
48

L0607448 Craftsman 10" Tablesaw

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L0607448 Craftsman 10" Tablesaw

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L0607448 Craftsman 10" Tablesaw

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

CAUTION: Customer Helpline

Sears, Roebuck and Co., Hoffman Estates, IL 60179 U.S.A.

FULL ONE YEAR WARRANTY

lO-in. Table Saw Max depth-of-cut at 90-degree 3-3/8-in.

Featherboard- Anaccessorydevicethatcanbemadeor RipCut- Theoperation

SawBladePath- Theareathatis directlyinlinewiththe

BEFORE USING THE TABLE SAW

To avoid serious injury and damage to the tool, read

23. SECURE ALL WORK. When it is possible, use

24. STAY ALERT, WATCH WHAT YOU ARE DOING,

25' LONG 50' LONG 100' LONG

6 to 10 Amps 18 AWG 18 AWG 14 AWG

27. DiRECTiON OF FEED. Feed work into a blade or

IN THE EVENT OF A MALFUNCTION OR BREAK- REPLACE A DAMAGED OR WORN CORD IMMEDI-

Fig. 1 C grounded outlet box

1. READ and understand the instruction manual

OBTAIN ADVICE FROM YOUR SUPERVISOR,

instructor, or another qualified person if you are not

4. DO NOT leave the Table Saw plugged into the elec-

8. DO NOT handle the plug or Table Saw with wet

* Stock Clamp, Miter Gauge 29880

Figure 2A illustrates dimensions for making a typical Fig. 2B

Use featherboards for all non-through cutting opera-

The table saw is a heavy machine, two people are

The right extension wing must be completely assem-

20. Auxiliary fence

21. Rip fence assembly

22. Fence front rail, right

23. Fence front rail, left

24. Fence rear rail (2)

25. Clamp knob with special nut (2)

26. Micro-Adjust assembly

27. Fence rear rail connector 27

28. Front rail end cap, right

29. Front rail end cap, left

30. Fence front rail alignment

40. Miter gauge

41. Cross cut fence

42. Depth stop

43. Clamp assembly

44. M5 x 20mm Hex socket head

45. M5 Flat washer (3)

46. M5 Square nut (3)

47. Elevating rod

48. Knob (2)

Hardware packs are not identified or labeled. See hardware

• Hardware Pack for Extension Wings (#0R92013)

1. Splitter assembly 10. Rear rail 19. Rubber foot

2. Blade guard 11. Auxiliary fence 20. Blade height handwheel

4. Blade 13. Micro Adjustment knob 22. Fence hook

• The table saw is a heavy machine; two people are A

CABINET LEG ASSEMBLY

MAKE CERTAIN the table saw is disconnected from C

A screws, M8 lock washers and M8 flat washers. Do

1. Make sure all packaging material has been

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to assemble the other

The right extension wing must be completely assem-

Figure 74 Figure 8-1